Lexus - LS 460 - Owners Manual - 2011 - 2011 (2)

1 QUICK GUIDE 11 2 BASIC FUNCTION 29 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 71 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 137 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 297 6 INFORMATION 313 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 317 8 PHONE 343 9 LEXUS ENFORM 381 10 12.3-INCH DISPLAY 409 INDEX 417 About the following equipment, see the “Owner’s Manual”.  Air conditioning  Fuel consumption  Energy monitor (LS600hL)  Vehicle customization settings  Lexus night view 1 LS460_600h_Navi_U Introduction NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL This manual explains the operation of the system. Please read this manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times. The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the system differ depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map data available at the time of producing this document. In some situations when changing between screens, it may take longer than normal for the screen to change, the screen may be blank momentarily or noise may be displayed. Please be aware that the content of this manual may be different from the system in some cases, such as when the system’s software is updated. NAVIGATION SYSTEM (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION) The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global Positioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals and other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating a desired destination. The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present starting location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you to a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The calculated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes. The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow you to easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the system will guide you there. The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when approaching an intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and are timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down. Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to page 132. 2 LS460_600h_Navi_U IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention with the following marks. CAUTION ●This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others. NOTICE ●This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment. SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS Safety symbol The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen”. Arrows indicating operations Indicates the action (pressing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens). 3 LS460_600h_Navi_U HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL No. Name Description Operational Outlines An outline of the operation is explained. Main Operations The steps of an operation are explained. Related Operations A main operation’s supplementary operations are described. Information Useful information for the user is described. ■ INFORMATION FOR HYBRID VEHICLES IS WRITTEN IN BRACKETS NEXT TO THE INFORMATION FOR GASOLINE VEHICLES Different writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles Example When the engine*1 *2 switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON*1 *2 mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating. *1: Vehicles with gasoline engine *2: Vehicles with hybrid system 4 LS460_600h_Navi_U SAFETY INSTRUCTION (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION) To use this system in the safest possible manner, follow all the safety tips shown below. This system is intended to assist in reaching the destination and, if used properly, can do so. The driver is solely responsible for the safe operation of your vehicle and the safety of your passengers. Do not use any feature of this system to the extent it becomes a distraction and prevents safe driving. The first priority while driving should always be the safe operation of the vehicle. While driving, be sure to observe all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learn how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual to make sure you understand the system. Do not allow other people to use this system until they have read and understood the instructions in this manual. For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed. Only when the vehicle is not moving, can the destination and route selection be done. While driving, listen to the voice instructions as much as possible and glance at the screen briefly and only when it is safe. However, do not totally rely on voice guidance. Use it just for reference. If the system cannot determine the current position correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late, or non-voice guidance. The data in the system may occasionally be incomplete. Road conditions, including driving restrictions (no left turns, street closures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore, before following any instructions from the system, look to see whether the instruction can be done safely and legally. This system cannot warn about such things as the safety of an area, condition of streets, and availability of emergency services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive into it. Under no circumstances is this system a substitute for the driver’s personal judgement. Use this system only in locations where it is legal to do so. Some states/provinces may have laws prohibiting the use of video and navigation screens next to the driver. CAUTION ●For safety, the driver should not operate the navigation system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may cause an accident. ●While driving, be sure to obey the traffic regulations and maintain awareness of the road conditions. If a traffic sign on the road has been changed, route guidance may not have the updated information such as the direction of a one way street. 5 LS460_600h_Navi_U SAFETY INSTRUCTION (WITHOUT NAVIGATION FUNCTION) To use this system in the safest possible manner, follow all the safety tips shown below. Do not use any feature of this system to the extent it becomes a distraction and prevents safe driving. The first priority while driving should always be the safe operation of the vehicle. While driving, be sure to observe all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learn how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual to make sure you understand the system. Do not allow other people to use this system until they have read and understood the instructions in this manual. For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed. CAUTION ●For safety, the driver should not operate the navigation system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may cause an accident. 6 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7 LS460_600h_Navi_U TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 QUICK GUIDE 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1. BASIC FUNCTION......................................... 12 1. BASIC OPERATION..................................... 72 Remote Touch........................................................... 12 “Menu” SCREEN .................................................... 14 QUICK REFERENCE..........................................72 MAP SCREEN OPERATION ........................ 75 MAP SCREEN INFORMATION..................80 TRAFFIC INFORMATION ..............................85 2. QUICK REFERENCE................................... 18 “Setup” SCREEN..................................................... 18 “Information” SCREEN........................................20 3. NAVIGATION OPERATION .................. 22 REGISTERING HOME...................................... 22 REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS ................................................23 OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE.................................24 SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION ........................................25 2. DESTINATION SEARCH...........................88 DESTINATION SEARCH OPERATION ......................................................88 STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ............. 100 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE................................. 105 ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN .................. 105 TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS...............................................................111 EDITING ROUTE ................................................. 112 4. FUNCTION INDEX...................................... 26 4. MEMORY POINTS......................................116 FUNCTION INDEX ............................................26 MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS .................... 116 2 BASIC FUNCTION 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ............................30 INITIAL SCREEN ..................................................30 HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch .............32 ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION.......................................................34 SCREEN ADJUSTMENT .................................. 37 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS................................. 39 REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE.........................................39 SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS .....................45 3. OTHER SETTINGS ....................................... 56 GENERAL SETTINGS .......................................56 VOICE SETTINGS ...............................................63 VEHICLE SETTINGS ..........................................65 8 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5. SETUP...............................................................126 DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS............................................................126 TRAFFIC SETTINGS ......................................... 130 6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ....................................................... 132 GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) ..............................................................132 MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA .......................................... 135 4 DVD (DVD VIDEO AND AVCHD DISC).............................................235 1 Blu-ray Disc (BD-Video AND BDAV)............................. 242 USB MEMORY...................................................250 2 iPod............................................................................253 Bluetooth® AUDIO...........................................256 3 SD CARD...............................................................259 EXTERNAL DEVICES ......................................271 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 1. BASIC OPERATION ...................................140 QUICK REFERENCE .......................................140 SOME BASICS..................................................... 142 2. RADIO OPERATION ................................. 151 AM/FM RADIO................................................................151 XM Satellite Radio .................................................161 INTERNET RADIO............................................. 167 3. MEDIA OPERATION ................................168 CD...............................................................................168 DVD..............................................................................171 USB MEMORY .................................................... 176 iPod.............................................................................180 Bluetooth® AUDIO ............................................184 AUX ...........................................................................189 4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS...........................193 STEERING SWITCHES....................................193 REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROLS ............196 9. SETUP FOR REAR SEAT 4 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM...............272 REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SETTINGS ..................................... 272 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM....................................................... 275 6 OPERATING INFORMATION ................. 275 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM..................298 CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION .....................................305 COMMAND LIST .............................................306 AUDIO SETTINGS.............................................199 OPERATING INFORMATION................. 204 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES ............................... 216 REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES...................................... 216 SOME BASICS..................................................... 219 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION..........................228 AM/FM/SAT RADIO...................................... 228 CD..............................................................................229 VIDEO CD.............................................................232 7 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 8 OPERATION.............................................298 5. SETUP .............................................................. 199 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM .........204 9 10 2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION............................................... 311 MOBILE ASSISTANT .........................................311 6 INFORMATION 1. INFORMATION DISPLAY .......................314 RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION.............................................. 314 DATA SERVICES SETTINGS....................... 316 9 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 9 LEXUS ENFORM 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW.............382 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR.................................. 318 LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR.........................................318 ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE............................................323 PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE............................................325 LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS ...................327 THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ............332 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW.......................382 TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE..............384 TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM.................388 TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM ..................391 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION.......... 392 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST............... 334 LEXUS Enform Remote................................... 392 LEXUS Enform Service Connect ............... 393 LEXUS App Suite ............................................... 394 LEXUS Enform Destinations .........................400 Lexus Insider..........................................................403 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ....................334 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING............................................. 341 8 PHONE 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) .......................... 344 QUICK REFERENCE ......................................344 SOME BASICS....................................................345 CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ...............................................................349 RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE .............................................................. 355 TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE ...............................................................356 Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION.......................................................359 2. SETUP............................................................. 364 PHONE SETTINGS ..........................................364 3. WHAT TO DO IF... ..................................... 375 TROUBLESHOOTING..................................375 10 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. SETUP............................................................. 406 LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS ......................406 10 12.3-INCH DISPLAY 1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION ............................................. 410 12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW........... 410 USING “Side Display” ........................................412 INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX............................... 418 1 1 QUICK GUIDE 2 1 BASIC FUNCTION 3 1. Remote Touch ............................................... 12 2. “Menu” SCREEN......................................... 14 4 STATUS DISPLAY...................................................... 16 5 2 QUICK REFERENCE 1. “Setup” SCREEN ......................................... 18 2. “Information” SCREEN............................. 20 3 NAVIGATION OPERATION 6 7 8 1. REGISTERING HOME............................ 22 2. REGISTERING PRESET 9 DESTINATIONS...................................... 23 3. OPERATION FLOW: 10 GUIDING THE ROUTE........................ 24 4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION............................... 25 4 FUNCTION INDEX 1. FUNCTION INDEX .................................. 26 11 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC FUNCTION 1. Remote Touch *1 *2 *1: With navigation function *2: Without navigation function 12 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC FUNCTION No. Name Page “MAP” button Press to display the current position, cancel the screen scroll, start guidance, and repeat a voice guidance. 72, 75 “ · ” button Press to scroll the list screen and to change the scale of the map*. 32, 35, 76 Back button Press to display the previous screen. 32 “MENU” button Press to display the “Menu” screen. 14 Remote Touch knob Move in the desired direction to select a function, letter and screen button. Press to enter the selected function, letter or screen button. 32 “ENTER” button Press to enter the selected function, letter or screen button. 32 “HOME” button Press to display the compass mode screen.  1 QUICK GUIDE Function *: With navigation function 13 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC FUNCTION 2. “Menu” SCREEN The “Menu” screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 14 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC FUNCTION No. Select to display the “Destination” screen. Page 1 88 QUICK GUIDE *1 Function Select to display the radio control screen. 140 Select to display the media control screen. *1, 2 Select to display the hands-free operation screen. 344 Select to display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen. 394 Select to display the “Information” screen. 20 Select to display the air conditioning control screen. “Owner’s Manual” Select to display the “Setup” screen. 18 Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn the screen off, etc. 37 *1: With navigation function *2: This function is not made available on some models. INFORMATION ●When the split-screen display is selected, the “Menu” screen will be displayed on the “Main Display”. (P. 410) 15 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY The condition of the Bluetooth® connection, as well as the level of reception and the amount of cellular phone battery charge left, are displayed on the status bar. This status bar is shown on all modes. No. Indicators Conditions (Gray) The condition of the Bluetooth® connection 16 LS460_600h_Navi_U (Blue) No connection Poor Good ®  An antenna for the Bluetooth connection is built into the instrument panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may deteriorate and the system may not function when a Bluetooth® phone is used in the following conditions and/or places: The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when it is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box). The cellular phone is touching or is covered with metal materials.  Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of the Bluetooth® connection is good. 1. BASIC FUNCTION No. Indicators The amount of battery charge left 1 Poor Excellent  The level of reception does not always correspond with the level displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be displayed depending on the phone you have. When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.  “Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area. While roaming, display “Rm” top-left on the icon.  The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of phone you have. Empty Full  The amount displayed does not always correspond with the amount displayed on the Bluetooth® device. The amount of battery charge left may not be displayed depending on the type of the Bluetooth® device connected. This system does not have a charging function. 17 LS460_600h_Navi_U QUICK GUIDE The level of reception Conditions 2. QUICK REFERENCE 1. “Setup” SCREEN The “Setup” screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”. 18 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. QUICK REFERENCE No. *1 Page Select to change the selected language, operation sound, automatic screen change settings, etc. 56 Select to set the voice guidance settings. 63 Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth® audio devices. 45 Select to set radio and external media settings. 199 Select to set traffic information. 130 Select to set memory points (home, preset destinations, address book entries, areas to avoid), navigation details or to delete previous destinations. 1 QUICK GUIDE *1, 2 Function 116, 126 Select to set vehicle information such as maintenance information. 65 Select to set the phone sound, contacts, message settings, etc. 364 *1, 2 Select to set LEXUS App Suite settings. 406 *2 Select to set data services settings. 316 *1: With navigation function *2: This function is not made available on some models. 19 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. QUICK REFERENCE 2. “Information” SCREEN The “Information” screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info”. 20 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. QUICK REFERENCE No. Function 1 “Owner’s Manual” *1, 2 Select to display traffic information. 85 *2 Select to display weather information. 314 *1, 2 Select to display the “LEXUS Insider” screen. 403 *1, 2 Select to display the vehicle alert history. QUICK GUIDE Select to display the energy monitor or fuel consumption screen. Page  *1: With navigation function *2: This function is not made available on some models. 21 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. NAVIGATION OPERATION 1. REGISTERING HOME* 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Dest.”. 3 Select “Go Home”. 4 Select “Yes”. 5 There are different kinds of methods to search for your home. (P. 88) 6 Select “Enter”. Select “OK”. Registration of home is complete. Registering home in a different way P. 117 Editing the name, location, phone number and icon P. 117 Setting home as the destination P. 90 7 *: With navigation function 22 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. NAVIGATION OPERATION 2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS* Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Dest.”. 3 Select one of the preset destination buttons. 4 Select “Yes”. 5 There are different kinds of methods to search for a destination. (P. 88) 6 Select “Enter”. 1 QUICK GUIDE 1 Select “OK”. Registration of preset destinations is complete. Registering preset destinations in a different way P. 118 Editing the name, location, phone number and icon P. 119 Setting preset destinations as the destination P. 90 7 *: With navigation function 23 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. NAVIGATION OPERATION 3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE* 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Dest.”. 3 There are different kinds of methods to search for a destination. (P. 88) 4 Select “Go”. 5 Select “OK”. Selecting routes other than the one recommended (P. 101) Guidance to the destination is displayed on the screen and can be heard via voice guidance. *: With navigation function 24 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. NAVIGATION OPERATION 4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION* Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Dest.”. 3 Select “Go Home”. 1 QUICK GUIDE 1 Select “OK”. Selecting routes other than the one recommended (P. 101) Guidance to the destination is displayed on the screen and can be heard via voice guidance. 4 *: With navigation function 25 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4. FUNCTION INDEX 1. FUNCTION INDEX Map* Displaying maps Page Viewing the map screen 72 Displaying the current position 75 Viewing the current position vicinity map 78 Changing the scale 76 Changing the map orientation 77 Displaying map Information 80 Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 105 Selecting the map mode 78 Displaying traffic information 85 Searching for destinations Page Searching for the destination 88 Changing the search area 90 Route guidance* Before starting or during route guidance Page Starting route guidance 100 Editing the route 112 Viewing the entire route map 107 Adjusting route guidance volume 63 Deleting the destination 113 Address book Page Registering address book entries 120 Marking icons on the map 121 26 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4. FUNCTION INDEX Useful functions Information Hands-free system (for cellular phone) 66 Page Registering/connecting a Bluetooth® phone 39 Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone 349 Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone 355 Voice command system Operating the system with your voice Peripheral monitoring system Viewing behind the rear of the vehicle QUICK GUIDE Displaying vehicle maintenance* 1 Page Page 298 Page 318 *: With navigation function 27 LS460_600h_Navi_U 28 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2 1 BASIC FUNCTION 2 1 BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 2 Bluetooth® SETTINGS 3 1. INITIAL SCREEN ....................................... 30 1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE............................... 39 4 2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch...... 32 REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME ......................................... 39 3. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION............................................ 34 REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME ....................... 41 PROFILES ...................................................................... 43 ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS........ 34 2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS ............ 45 LIST SCREEN.............................................................. 35 “Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN................................ 45 4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ........................ 37 REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE .......... 46 5 6 7 ® DELETING A Bluetooth DEVICE.................. 48 CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE...................................................................... 48 8 ® EDITING THE Bluetooth DEVICE INFORMATION.................................................... 50 “System Settings” SCREEN .................................. 52 10 3 OTHER SETTINGS 1. GENERAL SETTINGS.............................. 56 GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN ...................... 56 2. VOICE SETTINGS..................................... 63 VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN.............................. 63 3. VEHICLE SETTINGS ................................ 65 MAINTENANCE....................................................... 66 *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 29 LS460_600h_Navi_U 9 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 1. INITIAL SCREEN 1 When the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin operating.  Images shown on the initial screen can be changed to suit individual preferences. (P. 59)  After a few seconds, the “CAUTION” screen will be displayed. Waiting about 5 seconds or selecting “Continue” switches to the last displayed screen. (Press any button on the Remote Touch, the function’s corresponding screen will be displayed.) CAUTION ●When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running , always apply the parking brake for safety. MAINTENANCE INFORMATION* This system reminds users when to replace certain parts or components and shows dealer information (if registered) on the screen. When the vehicle reaches a previously set driving distance or date specified for a scheduled maintenance check, the “Maintenance Reminder” screen will be displayed when the system is turned on.  This screen goes off if the screen is not operated for several seconds.  To prevent this screen from being displayed again, select “Do Not Display This Message Again”.  To register maintenance information: P. 66  If is selected, the registered phone number can be called. *: With navigation function 30 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION RESTARTING THE SYSTEM When system response is extremely slow, the system can be restarted. 2 BASIC FUNCTION 1 Press and hold the “PWR•VOL” knob for 3 seconds or more. 31 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch This system can be operated by the Remote Touch when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 1 Use the Remote Touch knob to select the desired button on the screen.  When the pointer moves close to a button, it will be automatically pulled onto that button. The strength of this pull can be adjusted. (P. 56)  The pointer will disappear from the screen if it is not moved for 6 seconds. Operation of the Remote Touch knob will cause the pointer to reappear.  “ ” and “ ” buttons on the Remote Touch can be used to scroll up and down on list screens. With navigation function: Press the “ ” button on the Remote Touch to zoom in on the map screen and the “ ” button to zoom out.  When 2 To select a screen button, press the Remote Touch knob or an “ENTER” button. Once a button has been selected, the screen will change. 32 LS460_600h_Navi_U is displayed on the screen, select or press the button on the Remote Touch to return to the previous screen.  Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen. (P. 14)  With navigation function: The map screen can be displayed by pressing the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. (P. 75) Without navigation function: The compass screen can be displayed by pressing the “HOME” button on the Remote Touch. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION CAUTION ●Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Remote Touch as this may cause an injury. ●Be careful when touching the Remote Touch in extreme temperatures as it may become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle. 2 BASIC FUNCTION NOTICE ●Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop functioning. ●Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as the knob may bend or break off. ●Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop functioning. ●Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Remote Touch knob. ●If your hand or any object is on the Remote Touch knob when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touch knob may not operate properly. INFORMATION ●Under extremely cold conditions, the Remote Touch knob may react slowly. 33 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 3. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION When searching by an address, name, etc., or entering data, letters and numbers can be entered via the screen. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS No. Function Select to enter desired characters. Text field. Entered character(s) will be displayed. During character entry, when there is only one available option for the next character(s), the next character(s) will be displayed in gray text in the text field automatically. Gray text is entered by selecting this button. Select to erase one character. Select and hold to continue erasing characters. Select to display the alphabet keys. Select to display other symbols. 34 LS460_600h_Navi_U  On certain letter entry screens, letters can be entered in upper or lower case. : Select to enter in lower case. : Select to enter in upper case.  Keyboard layout can be changed. (P. 56) 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION LIST SCREEN INFORMATION LIST SCREEN OPERATION ■ SELECTING ALL ITEMS Icon Function Select to skip to the next or previous page. Select and hold or to scroll through the displayed list. This indicates the screen’s position. Some lists contain “Select All”. If “Select All” is selected, it is possible to select all items. 1 Select “Select All”. displayed If appears to the right of an item name, the complete name is too long to display. Select to scroll to the end of the name. “Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the list. Select to move to the beginning of the name. 35 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through the list. With navigation function: The list screen may be displayed after entering characters. ●With navigation function: Matching items from the database are listed even if the entered address or name is incomplete. ●With navigation function: The list will be displayed automatically if the maximum number of characters is entered or matching items can be displayed on a single list screen. ●With navigation function: The number of matching items is shown on the right side of the screen. If the number of matching items is more than 999, the system displays “” on the screen. ●The “ ” and “ ” buttons on the Remote Touch can be used to scroll up and down on list screens. 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION SORTING* The order of a list displayed on the screen can be sorted in the order of distance from the current location, date, category, etc. 1 Select “Sort”. CHARACTER JUMP BUTTONS IN LISTS Some lists contain character screen buttons, “ABC”, “DEF” etc., which allow a direct jump to list entries that begin with the same letter as the character screen button. 1 Select the desired character jump buttons. 2 Select the desired sorting criteria. INFORMATION ●Every time the same character screen button is selected, the list starting with the subsequent character is displayed. *: With navigation function 36 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION 4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT 3 Select the items to be set. 2 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. No. Function Page Select to turn the screen off. To turn it on, press any button on the audio panel or on the Remote Touch.  Select to turn day mode on/off. 38 Select to adjust the screen display. 2 Select “Display”. Select to adjust the camera display. 38 37 LS460_600h_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION The contrast and brightness of the screen display and the image of the camera display can be adjusted. The screen can also be turned off, and/or changed to either day or night mode. (For information regarding audio/visual screen adjustment: P. 149) 1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT MODE Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to day or night mode. This feature is available when the headlight is switched on. 1 Select “Day Mode”. INFORMATION ●If the screen is set to day mode with the headlight switch turned on, this condition is memorized even with the engine turned off. 38 LS460_600h_Navi_U ADJUSTING THE CONTRAST/ BRIGHTNESS The contrast and brightness of the screen can be adjusted according to the brightness of your surroundings. 1 Select “General” or “Camera”. 2 Select the desired item.  “Display (General)” screen only: Select “ ” or “ ” to select the desired display. Screen button Function “Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen the contrast of the screen. “Contrast” “-” Select to weaken the contrast of the screen. “Brightness” “+” Select to brighten the screen. “Brightness” “-” Select to darken the screen. 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS 1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME 2  Operations up to this point can also be performed by pressing the switch on the steering wheel. 4 Select “Yes” to register a phone. 1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your cellular phone on.  This function is not available when Bluetooth® connection setting of your cellular phone is set to off. 2 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 5 When this screen is displayed, search for the device name displayed on this screen on the screen of your Bluetooth® device.  For details about operating the Bluetooth® device, see the manual that comes with it.  To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”. 39 LS460_600h_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth® phone with the system. Once the phone has been registered, it is possible to use the hands-free system. This operation cannot be performed while driving. For details about registering a Bluetooth® device: P. 46 3 Select “Phone”. 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS 6 Register the Bluetooth® device using your Bluetooth® device.  A PIN code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth® device’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® device according to the confirmation message. 7 Check that the following screen is dis- played, indicating pairing was successful (a Bluetooth® link has been established but registration is not yet complete).  The system waits for connection requests coming from the registered device.  At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions are not yet available.  To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”. 40 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8 Check that “Connected” is displayed and registration is complete.  If displayed, select “OK” to complete the registration process.  If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. INFORMATION ●If a cellular phone does not operate properly after being connected, turn the cellular phone off and on and then connect it again. 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME 3 Select “Radio” or “Media”. 2 To use the Audio, it is necessary to register an audio player with the system. Once the player has been registered, it is possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. This operation cannot be performed while driving. For details about registering a Bluetooth® device: P. 46 BASIC FUNCTION Bluetooth® 4 Select “Source”. 1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your audio player on.  This function is not available when the Bluetooth® connection setting of your audio player is set to off. 5 Select “Bluetooth*”. 2 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 41 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS 6 Select “Connect”. 7 Select “Yes” to register a audio player. 8 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME” from “STEP 5”. (P. 39) 42 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS PROFILES This system supports the following services. 2 Bluetooth® Phone/ Bluetooth® Audio Player Spec. Bluetooth® Specification Bluetooth® Device Profile HFP (Hands-Free Profile) OPP (Object Push Profile) Bluetooth® Phone Bluetooth® Audio Player PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Function Requirements Recommendations Registering a Bluetooth® device Ver.2.0 Ver.3.0 +EDR Function Requirements Recommendations Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.6 Ver.1.1 Ver.1.2 Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.1 Hands-free system Transferring the contacts MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® phone message  Ver. 1.0 SPP (Serial Port Profile) “LEXUS App Suite” function*  Ver. 1.2 Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.5 A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Bluetooth® audio system *: With navigation function 43 LS460_600h_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION Bluetooth Device ® 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS INFORMATION ●If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible. ●If the connected Bluetooth® device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth® device function may not work properly. ●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this system. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 44 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS 2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 4 Select the desired item to be set. 2 BASIC FUNCTION “Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Bluetooth*”. Function Page ® Registering a Bluetooth device 46 Deleting a Bluetooth® device 48 Connecting a Bluetooth® device 48 Editing the Bluetooth formation ® device in- Bluetooth® system settings 50 52 *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 45 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS DISPLAYING THE “Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Phone”. 4 Select “Connect Phone”. Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP) and audio players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. This operation cannot be performed while driving. Remote Touch. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 45) 2 Select “Add”. When another Bluetooth® device is connected  To disconnect the Bluetooth® device, select “Yes”. When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered  A registered device needs to be replaced. Select “Yes”, and select the device to be replaced. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 46 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS 3 When this screen is displayed, search 5 Check that the following screen is dis-  For details about operating the Bluetooth® device, see the manual that comes with it.  To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.  The system waits for connection requests coming from the registered device. for the device name displayed on this screen on the screen of your Bluetooth® device. played, indicating pairing was successful (a Bluetooth® link has been established but registration is not yet 2 complete). BASIC FUNCTION 4 Register the Bluetooth® device using your Bluetooth® device.  A PIN code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® device being connected, a message confirming registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth® device’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® device according to the confirmation message.  At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions are not yet available.  To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”. 6 Check that “Connected” is displayed and registration is complete.  If displayed, select “OK” to complete the registration process.  If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. 47 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE This operation cannot be performed while driving. Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones (HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can be registered. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 45) 2 Select “Remove”. 3 Select the desired device. If more than 1 Bluetooth® device has been registered, select which device to connect to. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 45) 2 Select the device to be connected. 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. INFORMATION ●When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the contact data will be deleted at the same time.  Supported profile icons will be displayed. : Phone : Audio player : Phone/“LEXUS App Suite” service  The profile icon for a currently connected device will be displayed in color.  Selecting a profile icon which is not currently connected will switch the connection to the function.  If the desired Bluetooth® device is not on the list, select “Add” to register the device. (P. 46) *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 48 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS 3 Select the desired connection. ■ AUTO CONNECTION MODE 4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the connection is complete.  If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. INFORMATION ●It may take time if the device connection is carried out during Bluetooth® audio playback. ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® device being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the device. ●When disconnecting a Bluetooth® device, it is recommended to disconnect using the system.  When the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system searches for a nearby registered device.  The system will connect with the registered device that was last connected, if it is nearby. When automatic connection priority is set to on and there is more than one registered Bluetooth® phone available, the system will automatically connect to the Bluetooth® phone with the highest priority. (P. 53) ■ CONNECTING MANUALLY When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is necessary to connect Bluetooth® manually. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Bluetooth*”. 4 Follow the steps in “CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE” from “STEP 2”. (P. 48) *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 49 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION To turn auto connection mode on, set “Bluetooth* Power” to on. (P. 53) Leave the Bluetooth® device in a location where the connection can be established. 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ■ RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth® PHONE EDITING THE Bluetooth® DEVICE INFORMATION If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® network when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the Bluetooth® phone. The Bluetooth® device’s information can be displayed on the screen. The displayed information can be edited. This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 45) 2 Select the desired device to be edited. 3 Select “Device Info”. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 50 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS 4 Confirm and change the Bluetooth® device information. INFORMATION CHANGING A DEVICE NAME 1 Select “Device Name”. 2 Enter the name and select “OK”. INFORMATION No. ●Even if the device name is changed, the name registered in your Bluetooth® device does not change. Information The name of the Bluetooth® device. Can be changed to a desired name. (P. 51) Select to set the Bluetooth® audio player connection method. (P. 52) Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed. Phone number of the Bluetooth® phone. Compatibility profile Bluetooth® device. of the Select to reset all setup items. 51 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION ●If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been registered with the same device name, the devices can be distinguished referring to the device’s address. ●Depending on the type of phone, some information may not be displayed. 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS SETTING AUDIO PLAYER CONNECTION METHOD 1 Select “Connect Audio Player from”. 2 Select the desired connection method. “System Settings” SCREEN The Bluetooth® settings can be confirmed and changed. 1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen. (P. 45) 2 Select “System Settings”. 3 Select the desired item to be set. “Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio system to the audio player. “Device”: Select to connect the audio player to the audio system.  Depending on the audio player, the “Vehicle” or “Device” connection method may be best. As such, refer to the manual that comes with the audio player. No. Function Page Select to set Bluetooth® connection on/off. 53 Select to change the automatic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth® devices. 53 Select to edit the system information. 54 Select to reset all setup items.  *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 52 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power” 1 Select “Bluetooth* Power”. When “Bluetooth* Power” is on: The automatic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth® devices can be changed. 1 Select “Preferred Device Settings”. 2 Select the desired item to be set. INFORMATION ●While driving, the auto connection state can be changed from off to on, but cannot be changed from on to off. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. No. Function Page Select to set automatic connection priority on/off.  Select to change the automatic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth® phones. 54 Select to change the automatic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth® audio players. 54 Select to reset all setup items.  INFORMATION ●A newly registered Bluetooth® device will automatically be given the highest automatic connection priority. 53 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION The Bluetooth® device is automatically connected when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. When “Bluetooth* Power” is off: The Bluetooth® device is disconnected, and the system will not connect to it next time. SETTING AUTOMATIC CONNECTION PRIORITY 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ■ CHANGING PHONE AUTOMATIC CONNECTION PRIORITY EDITING THE SYSTEM INFORMATION 1 Select “Preferred Phones”. 2 Select the desired Bluetooth® device 1 Select “System Information”. 2 Select the desired item to be set. and select “Up” or “Down” to change the preferred order. ■ CHANGING AUDIO PLAYER AUTOMATIC CONNECTION PRIORITY 1 Select “Preferred Audio Players”. 2 Select the desired Bluetooth® device and select “Up” or “Down” to change the preferred order. 54 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS No. Information Page Displays system name. Can be changed to a desired name. 55 ■ EDITING THE SYSTEM NAME 1 Select “System Name”. 2 Enter a name and select “OK”. 2 ■ EDITING THE PIN CODE 55 Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed.  Select to set the phone connection status display on/ off.  Select to set the connection status display of the audio player on/off.  Compatibility profile of the system  Select to reset all setup items.  BASIC FUNCTION PIN code used when the Bluetooth® device was registered. Can be changed to a desired code. 1 Select “System PIN Code”. 2 Enter a PIN code and select “OK”. 55 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. OTHER SETTINGS 1. GENERAL SETTINGS Settings are available for automatic screen change, operation sounds, etc. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “General”. 4 Select the items to be set. 56 LS460_600h_Navi_U GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN 3. OTHER SETTINGS No. Function Select to change the time zone, set the daylight saving time on/off and set the automatic adjustment of the clock on/off. (P. 58) * Select to change the unit of measure for distance. Select to change the screen button color. Select to change the keyboard layout. Select to customize the startup/ screen off images. (P. 59) * Select to set automatic screen changes from the audio/air conditioning control screen to the previous screen to on/off. When set to on, the screen will automatically return to the previous screen from the audio/air conditioning control screen after 20 seconds. Function Select to adjust the pointer sound volume. Select to adjust the strength of the pull from the buttons to the pointer. Select to delete personal data. (P. 61) Select to update software versions. For details, contact your Lexus dealer. Select to update “Gracenote” database versions. For details, contact your Lexus dealer. Select to display the software information. Notices related to third party software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.) Select to set the selection sounds on/off. Select to set the pointer sounds on/ off. Select to set the error sounds on/off. *: With navigation function 57 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION Select to change the language. No. 3. OTHER SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS Used for changing the time zone and setting of daylight saving time and automatic time adjustment on/off. 1 Display the “General Settings” screen. (P. 56) 2 Select “Clock”. 3 Select the items to be set. ■ SETTING THE TIME ZONE 1 Select “Time Zone”. 2 Select the desired time zone.  If “Other” is selected, the zone can be adjusted manually. Select “+” or “-” to adjust the time zone. ■ MANUAL CLOCK SETTING When “Auto Adjust by GPS” is turned “Off”, the clock can be manually adjusted. 1 Select the desired item. No. Function Select to change the time zone. (P. 58) Select to set daylight saving time on/ off. Select to set automatic adjustment of the clock by GPS on/off. When set to on, the system will automatically adjust the clock to the current position’s time zone when the vehicle moves to a different time zone. When set to off, the clock can be manually adjusted. (P. 58) 58 LS460_600h_Navi_U No. Function Select “+” to set the time forward one hour and “-” to set the time back one hour. Select “+” to set the time forward one minute and “-” to set the time back one minute. Select to round to the nearest hour. e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00 1:30 to 1:59  2:00 3. OTHER SETTINGS CUSTOMIZING THE STARTUP AND SCREEN OFF IMAGES 2 No. Function Page Select to copy images from a USB memory. 60 Select to delete images. 61 Select to set an image as the startup or screen off image. 61 1 Display the “General Settings” screen. (P. 56) 2 Select “Customize Images”. 59 LS460_600h_Navi_U BASIC FUNCTION An image can be copied from a USB memory and used as the startup and screen off Images. The built-in movie can also be set as the startup image. When the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the initial screen (startup image) will be displayed. (P. 30) When “Screen Off” on the “Display” screen is selected, the screen is turned off and the desired screen off image that is set is displayed. (To turn the screen off: P. 37) 3 Select the items to be set. 3. OTHER SETTINGS ■ TRANSFERRING IMAGES 1 Open the console box, then open the cover and connect a USB memory. NOTICE ●Depending on the size and shape of the device that is connected to the system, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this may damage the device or the terminal, etc. INFORMATION  Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on. 2 Close the console box. 3 Select “Copy from USB”. 4 Select the desired images from the list and then select “Copy”.  The selected image is displayed on the right side of the screen. If the selected image file is broken or incompatible, will be displayed.  The remaining number of image files that can be transferred is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 5 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 60 LS460_600h_Navi_U ●When saving image files to a USB memory to be transferred to the system, save the images in a folder named “Image” (Im-a-g-e, case sensitive). If a different folder name is used, the system will not recognize the image files. ●The compatible file extensions are JPG and JPEG. ●An image's file name, including file extension, can be up to 32 characters. ●Image files of 10 MB or less can be transferred. ●Up to 10 images can be transferred to the system. ●Files with non-ASCII filenames can not be transferred. 3. OTHER SETTINGS ■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAGES 1 Select “Set Images”. 2 Select the “Movies” or “Images” tab 1 Select “Delete Images”. 2 Select the images to be deleted and se- 3 Select the desired items to be set. 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation and select the desired movie or image. lect “Delete”. screen appears. DELETING PERSONAL DATA 1 Display the “General Settings” screen. (P. 56) No. Function Select to set an image as the startup image. 2 Select “Delete Personal Data”. 3 Select “Delete”. 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. Select to set an image as the screen off image. Select to set an image as both the startup and screen off image. 61 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION ■ SETTING THE STARTUP AND SCREEN OFF IMAGES 3. OTHER SETTINGS  Registered or changed personal settings will be deleted or returned to their default conditions. For example: • General settings • Navigation settings* • Audio settings • Phone settings • Lexus Enform settings* *: With navigation function NOTICE ●With navigation function: Make sure the map microSD card is inserted when deleting personal data. The personal data cannot be deleted when the map microSD card is removed. To delete the data, after inserting the map microSD card, turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 62 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. OTHER SETTINGS 2. VOICE SETTINGS Voice guidance etc. can be set. VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 BASIC FUNCTION * 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Voice”. 4 Select the items to be set. INFORMATION *: With navigation function ●“Voice Settings” screen can also be displayed from the voice recognition top screen. (P. 301) 63 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. OTHER SETTINGS No. Function Select to adjust the volume of voice guidance. * Select to set the voice guidance during route guidance on/off. * Select to set the voice guidance during audio/visual and/or air conditioning system use on/off. Select to set the voice recognition prompts on/off. Select to train voice recognition. The voice command system adapt the user accent. Select to set the voice confirmation display on/off. * Select to set the beep sound of navigation guidance. Select to reset all setup items. *: With navigation function 64 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. OTHER SETTINGS 3. VEHICLE SETTINGS Settings are available for maintenance, vehicle customization, intuitive parking assist-sensor, etc. 4 Select the items to be set. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Remote Touch. * 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Vehicle”. BASIC FUNCTION No. Function Page Select to set maintenance. 66 Select to set vehicle customization. “Owner’s Manual” Select to set intuitive parking assist-sensor. 341 Select to set back camera guide line. 322 *: With navigation function 65 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. OTHER SETTINGS MAINTENANCE* When the system is turned on, the “Maintenance Reminder” screen displays when it is time to replace a part or certain components. (P. 30) 1 Display the “Vehicle Settings” screen. (P. 65) 2 Select “Maintenance”. 3 Select the desired item. No. Function Page Select to set the condition of parts or components. 67 Select to add new information items separately from provided ones.  Select to cancel all conditions which have been entered.  Select to reset the items which have expired conditions.  Select to call the registered dealer.  Select to register/edit dealer information. 67 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate. The system is set to give maintenance information with the “Maintenance Reminder” screen. 30 INFORMATION ●When the vehicle needs to be serviced, the screen button color will change to orange. *: With navigation function 66 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. OTHER SETTINGS MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SETTING 1 Select the desired part or component screen button. ●For scheduled maintenance information, refer to “Warranty and Services Guide/ Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. ●Depending on driving or road conditions, the actual date and distance that maintenance should be performed may differ from the stored date and distance in the system. DEALER SETTING No. Function Select to enter the next maintenance date. Select to enter the driving distance until the next maintenance check. Select to cancel the conditions which have been entered. Dealer information can be registered in the system. With dealer information registered, route guidance to the dealer is available. 1 Select “Set Dealer”. 2 Select the desired item to search for the location. (P. 88)  The editing dealer screen appears after setting the location. Select to reset the conditions which have expired. 3 Select “OK” after entering the conditions. 67 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2 BASIC FUNCTION 2 Set the conditions. INFORMATION 3. OTHER SETTINGS 3 Select the items to be edited. ■ EDITING DEALER OR CONTACT NAME 1 Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or “Contact”. 2 Enter the name and select “OK”. ■ EDITING THE LOCATION No. Function Page Select to enter the name of a dealer. 68 Select to enter the name of a dealer member. 68 Select to set the location. 68 Select to enter the phone number. 68 Select to delete the dealer information displayed on the screen.  Select to set the displayed dealer as a destination. 100 68 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”. 2 Scroll the map to the desired point (P. 79) and select “OK”. ■ EDITING PHONE NUMBER 1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”. 2 Enter the phone number and select “OK”. 3. OTHER SETTINGS 2 BASIC FUNCTION 69 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM* 1 BASIC OPERATION 2 DESTINATION SEARCH MAP SCREEN............................................................. 72 1. DESTINATION SEARCH OPERATION ........................................... 88 NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN .............. 74 SELECTING SEARCH AREA............................ 90 1. QUICK REFERENCE............................... 72 2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION................ 75 SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION............ 90 CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY...................... 75 SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS AS DESTINATION............................................... 90 MAP SCALE ................................................................ 76 SEARCHING BY ADDRESS................................ 91 ORIENTATION OF THE MAP........................... 77 SEARCHING BY POINT OF INTEREST.......................................... 92 SWITCHING THE MAP MODE........................ 78 SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION..................... 78 ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL INCREMENTS....................................... 79 DESTINATION SEARCH BY DESTINATION ASSIST ...................................... 96 SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS..................................................... 96 3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION......... 80 SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK.............. 96 DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION ........... 80 SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY..................... 97 DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET ......................................... 83 SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION AND FREEWAY............... 97 STANDARD MAP ICONS .................................. 84 SEARCHING BY COORDINATES................ 99 4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION .................... 85 DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP................... 86 SEARCHING BY MAP........................................... 99 2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ........................................... 100 CONFIRM DESTINATION SCREEN............ 101 ENTIRE ROUTE MAP SCREEN....................... 101 70 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 1 NAVIGATION SYSTEM* 2 3 ROUTE GUIDANCE 1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN.......... 105 SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE............ 105 5 SETUP 1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................ 126 4 SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................................ 126 ROUTE OVERVIEW ............................................. 107 DURING FREEWAY DRIVING....................... 107 WHEN APPROACHING INTERSECTION................................................... 109 2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS ............................... 130 6 TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN............ 110 3. EDITING ROUTE...................................... 112 ADDING DESTINATIONS .................................. 112 REORDERING DESTINATIONS...................... 112 DELETING DESTINATIONS ............................. 113 SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES................. 113 SELECTING ROUTE TYPE ................................ 113 DETOUR SETTING ................................................. 114 STARTING FROM ADJACENT ROAD....... 115 6 TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM 7 1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) .................................................. 132 8 LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................... 132 9 2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA ..................... 135 MAP INFORMATION .......................................... 135 ABOUT THE MAP DATA ................................... 135 4 MEMORY POINTS 1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS............ 116 SETTING UP HOME ............................................... 117 SETTING UP PRESET DESTINATIONS.................................................... 118 SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK ..................... 120 SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID .................. 123 DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS................................................... 125 *: With navigation function 71 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5 SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC SETTINGS.............. 130 TURN LIST SCREEN............................................... 110 2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS .................................................. 111 3 10 1. BASIC OPERATION 1. QUICK REFERENCE MAP SCREEN The map screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. No. * Name Function Page 2D north up, 2D heading up or 3D heading up symbol Indicates whether the map orientation is set to north-up or heading-up. The letter(s) beside this symbol indicate the vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N for north). In 3D map, only a heading-up view is available. 77 Scale indicator This figure indicates the map scale. 76 “GPS” mark (Global Positioning System) Shows that the vehicle is receiving signals from the GPS. 132 Traffic indicator Shows that traffic information is received. Select to start voice guidance for traffic information. When traffic information is received via HD Radio broadcast, HD mark is displayed on the right. 85 Options button Select to display the “Navigation Options” screen. 74 72 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION No. Name Function Page Zoom in/out button Select to magnify or reduce the map scale. When either button is selected, the map scale indicator bar appears at the bottom of the screen. 76 Footprint button Select to display the footprint map screen. 76 map 3 Select to display the “Destination” screen. 88 Speed limit icon Indicates the speed limit on the current road. The display of the speed limit icon can be set to on/off. 80 Route information bar Displays the current street name, or the distance with the estimated travel time/arrival time to the destination. The route information bar fills from left to right as the vehicle progresses on the route. Route information button Select to change the display between the current street name and the distance with the estimated travel/arrival time. Screen button Select to change the map screen to full screen display. change NAVIGATION SYSTEM Destination button 105  *: This function is not made available on some models. INFORMATION ●Certain screen buttons on the map screen will disappear several seconds after the Remote Touch has been operated. This setting can be changed so that all the screen buttons will always be displayed.(P. 126) ●Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch to display the address of the current position on the map screen or repeat voice guidance. 73 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN The navigation options screen can be reached by the following methods: Select on the map screen. (P. 72) No. Function Page Select to display the desired map configuration. 78 Select to set display of the map information such as POI icons, route trace, speed limit, etc. 80 Select to display the map version and coverage area. 135 Select to edit the set route. 112 Select to pause or resume route guidance.  Select to display the overview of the entire route. 107 74 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION 2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. displayed. ●While driving, the current position mark is fixed on the screen and the map moves. ●The current position is automatically set as the vehicle receives signals from the GPS (Global Positioning System). If the current position is not correct, it is automatically corrected after the vehicle receives signals from the GPS. ●After the 12-volt battery disconnection, or on a new vehicle, the current position may not be correct. As soon as the system receives signals from the GPS, the correct current position is displayed. ●When the vehicle travels out of the coverage area, the guidance screen changes to the whole compass mode screen.  Selecting will change the map screen to full screen display.  To correct the current position manually:P. 129 75 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2 Check that the current position map is INFORMATION 1. BASIC OPERATION MAP SCALE 1 Select or to change the scale of the map screen. FOOTPRINT MAP For areas covered by the footprint map (some major cities), a footprint map on a scale of 75 ft. (25 m) can be selected. When the map is scaled down to 150 ft. (50 m), changes to and can be selected to display the footprint map. 1 Select on the map screen. 2 Check that the footprint map is dis The scale indicator bar appears at the bottom of the screen. played.  Select and hold or to continue changing the scale of the map screen.  The scale of the map screen can also be changed by selecting the scale bar directly. This function is not available while driving. INFORMATION ●Press the “ ” button on the Remote Touch to zoom in on the map screen and the “ ” button to zoom out. ●In areas where the footprint map is available the map scale changes from to when at the minimum range.  To return to the normal map display, select . INFORMATION ●If the map or the current position is moved to the area which is not covered by the footprint map, the screen scale automatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m). ●On the footprint map, a one way street is displayed by . ●Scrolling on the footprint map is not available while driving. Building footprints in the database were created and provided by HERE. 76 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION 3D CITY MODEL MAP ORIENTATION OF THE MAP A 3D city model map can be displayed for some areas in major cities when the map scale is 700 ft. (200 m) or less on the 3D map screen.  To display the normal map, select . ●The 3D city model map can be set the display on/off. (P. 126) ROTATING 3D MAP 3D map and 3D city model map can be rotated when arrows appear around the cursor while scrolling. 1 Select an arrow to rotate. : North-up symbol Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel, north is always up. : Heading-up symbol The direction of vehicle travel is always up. : 3D Heading-up symbol The direction of vehicle travel is always up.  The letter(s) beside this symbol indicate the vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N for north). INFORMATION ●The viewing angle of the 3D map can be changed. (P. 128) 77 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM INFORMATION The orientation of the map can be changed between 2D north-up, 2D heading-up and 3D heading-up by selecting the orientation symbol displayed at the top left of the screen. 1. BASIC OPERATION SWITCHING THE MAP MODE 1 Select on the map screen. (P. 72) 2 Select “Map Mode”. 3 Select the desired configuration button. No. SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION Use the scroll feature to move the desired point to the center of the screen for looking at a point on the map that is different from the current position. Function Page Select to display the single map screen.  Cursor mark Select to display the turn list screen. 110 Distance from the current position to the cursor mark Select to display the freeway exit list screen. 107 Select to display the intersection guidance screen or the guidance screen on the freeway. 109 Select to display the turnby-turn arrow screen. 110 Select to set as a destination. When selecting “Go to ” on the following map screen, the navigation system performs a search for the route. (P. 100) If a destination has already been set, “Go to ” and “Add to Route” will be displayed. “Go to ”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one. “Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.  Depending on the conditions, certain screen configuration buttons cannot be selected. 78 LS460_600h_Navi_U No. Information/Function Select to register as a memory point. To change the icon, name, etc.: P. 120 1. BASIC OPERATION  To scroll over the map screen, place the cursor mark in the desired position and then press and hold the Remote Touch knob. The map will continue scrolling in that direction until the knob is released.  Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch to return to the current position. ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL INCREMENTS 1 Select one of the 8 directional arrows to move the cursor to the desired point and then select “OK”. 79 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM The cursor location can be adjusted in small increments when “Adjust Location” is selected on the setting map screen. Also, when changing the location of memory points on the editing screen (P. 122) and adjusting the current position mark manually on the “Calibration” screen (P. 129), 8 directional arrows may appear for this purpose. 1. BASIC OPERATION 3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION SELECTING THE POI ICONS DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION 1 Display the “Map Information” screen. Information such as POI icons, route trace, speed limit, etc. can be displayed on the map screen. 1 Select on the map screen. (P. 80) 2 Select “Select POI”.  When the POI icons to be displayed on the map screen have already been set, “Change POI” is displayed. 3 Select the desired POI category and se- (P. 72) 2 Select “Map Information”. 3 Select the desired items to be displayed. lect “OK”. No. No. * * Function Page Select to display the selected POI icons.  Select to select or change POI icons. 80 Select to display eDestination icons. 401 Select to display route trace. 82 Select to display traffic information. 85 Select to display speed limit icon.  *: This function is not made available on some models.  When set to on, the indicator will illuminate. 80 LS460_600h_Navi_U Information/Function Page Displays up to 5 selected POI icons on the map screen.  Select to cancel the selected POI icons.  Displays up to 6 POI icons as favorite POI categories 127 Select to display other POI categories if the desired POIs cannot be found on the screen. 81 Select to search for the nearest POIs. 81 1. BASIC OPERATION ■ SELECTING OTHER POI ICONS TO BE DISPLAYED 1 Select “Other POIs”. 2 Select the desired POI categories and POIs that are within 20 miles (32 km) of the current position will be listed from among the selected categories. 1 Select “Find Local POI”. 2 Select the desired POI. 3 “Near...”: Select to search for POIs near the current position or along the route. 3 Check that the selected POI is dis- played on the map screen. When “Near...” is selected 1 Select the desired item. No. Function Select to search for POIs near the current position. Select to search for POIs along the route. 81 LS460_600h_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM select “OK”. “List All Categories”: Select to display all POI categories. To add more POI categories, select “More”. ■ DISPLAYING THE LOCAL POI LIST 1. BASIC OPERATION ROUTE TRACE ■ STOP RECORDING THE ROUTE TRACE The traveled route can be stored and retraced on the map screen. This feature is available when the map scale is 30 miles (50 km) or less. 1 Display the “Map Information” screen. ■ START RECORDING THE ROUTE TRACE “Yes”: Select to keep the recorded route trace. “No”: Select to erase the recorded route trace. 1 Display the “Map Information” screen. (P. 80) 2 Select “Route Trace”.  The “Route Trace” indicator illuminates and the route trace starts. 3 Check that the traveled line is displayed. 82 LS460_600h_Navi_U (P. 80) 2 Select “Route Trace” again. 3 A confirmation screen will be displayed. INFORMATION ●The traveled route can be stored up to 124 miles (200 km). 1. BASIC OPERATION “Mark”: Select to register as a memory point. To change the icon, name, etc.: P. 120 “Enter ”: Select to set as a destination. When the cursor is placed over an icon on the map screen, the name bar is displayed on the upper part of the screen. If “Info” appears on the right side of the name bar, detailed information can be displayed. : Select to call the registered number. 3 “Delete”: Select to delete destination or memory point. “Edit”: Select to display the edit memory point screen. “Detail”: Select to display detailed information. 1 Place the cursor over an icon. 2 Select “Info”. NAVIGATION SYSTEM DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET 83 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION INFORMATION ●Even when traffic information is not currently being received, traffic information and “Info” will be displayed for a while after traffic information has been received. ●In some situations, calls to a POI may automatically change to an international call or may not be possible as a domestic call. STANDARD MAP ICONS Icon Name Island Park Industry Business facility Airport Military University Hospital Stadium Shopping mall Golf 84 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION 4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION* Traffic data can be received via HD Radio broadcast or LEXUS App Suite to display traffic information on the map screen. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION A list of current traffic information can be displayed along with information on the location and the distance of the incident. “On Current Road”: Select to display traffic information for the current road. “On Current Route”: Select to display traffic information for the set route.  When set to on, the indicator will illuminate. 2 Select “Info”. 3 Select “Traffic Incidents”. 4 Select the desired item. 4 Check that the traffic information is dis- “Traffic Event List”: Select to display a list of current traffic information. (P. 85) “Predictive Traffic Map”: Select to display a map with predictive traffic data. (P. 86) played. “Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic information. INFORMATION ●If a large amount of information is being received, it may take longer than normal for the information to be displayed on the screen. *: This function is not made available on some models. 85 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (P. 85) 2 Select “Traffic Event List”. 3 Select the desired traffic information. 1. BASIC OPERATION DISPLAYING PREDICTIVE TRAFFIC MAP DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP A map with predictive traffic data can be displayed. 1 Select 1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (P. 85) 2 Select “Predictive Traffic Map”. 3 Scroll the map to the desired point and 2 Select “Map Information”. 3 Select “Traffic Information”. set the time of predictive traffic information.  The time of the predictive traffic information can be displayed in 15-minute steps up to +45 minutes. “+”: Moves the time forward 15 minutes. “-”: Moves the time back 15 minutes. 86 LS460_600h_Navi_U on the map screen. (P. 72)  When set to on, the indicator will illuminate. 4 Check that the traffic information is displayed. 1. BASIC OPERATION : The icons show traffic incident, road repair, traffic obstacles, etc. Select to display traffic information and start voice guidance for the traffic information. : The color of the arrow changes depending on the traffic information received. 3 ceived. NAVIGATION SYSTEM  The indicator is displayed as follows: : Traffic information has been re- : Traffic information has been received via HD Radio broadcast. No icon: Traffic information has not been received. 87 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. DESTINATION SEARCH 1. DESTINATION SEARCH OPERATION The “Destination” screen can be reached by the following methods: From the map screen Select “Dest.”on the map screen. (P. 72) From the “Menu” screen Select “Destination” on the “Menu” screen. (P. 14) No. Function Page Select to search for a destination by address. 91 Select to search for a destination by point of interest. 92 * Select to search for a destination by online database. 398 * Select to search for a destination via the Lexus response center. 400 Select to search for a destination from previously set destinations. 96 Select to search for a destination from a registered entry in “Address Book”. 96 Select to search for a destination from emergency service points. 97 Select to search for a destination by intersection or freeway entrance/ exit. 97 88 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. DESTINATION SEARCH No. Function Page Select to search for a destination by the last displayed map. 99 Select to search for a destination by coordinates. 99 Select to set a destination by home. 90 Select to set a destination from preset destinations. 90 Select to delete set destinations. 113 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM *: This function is not made available on some models. 89 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. DESTINATION SEARCH SELECTING SEARCH AREA The selected state (province) can be changed to set a destination from a different state (province) by using “Address”, “Point of Interest” or “Intersection & Freeway”. 1 Display the “Destination” screen. (P. 88) 2 Select “Address”, “Point of Interest” or “Intersection & Freeway”. 3 Select “Select State/Province” or “Change State/Province”. SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION To use this function, it is necessary to register a home address. (P. 117) 1 Display the “Destination” screen. (P. 88) 2 Select “Go Home”.  The navigation system performs a search for the route and the entire route map is displayed. (P. 101) SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS AS DESTINATION To use this function, it is necessary to register preset destinations to the preset screen buttons (1-5). (P. 118)  If a state (province) has not been selected yet, “Select State/Province” is displayed. 4 Select the desired state (province).  To change countries, select the “United States”, “Canada” or “Mexico” tab.  For map database information and updates: P. 135 1 Display the “Destination” screen. (P. 88) 2 Select any of the preset destination buttons (1-5).  The navigation system performs a search for the route and the entire route map is displayed. (P. 101) 90 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. DESTINATION SEARCH SEARCHING BY CITY SEARCHING BY ADDRESS There are 2 methods to search for a destination by address. 1 Select “City”. 2 Enter a city name and select “OK”. 1 Display the “Destination” screen. “Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name from the list of the last 5 cities. (P. 88) 3 Select the desired city name. Enter a street name and select “OK”. Select the desired street name. Enter a house number and select “OK”.  If the same address exists, the address list screen will be displayed. Select the desired address. No. Function Page Select to search by city. 91 Select to search by street address. 92 91 LS460_600h_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3 4 5 6 2 Select “Address”. 3 Select the desired search method. 2. DESTINATION SEARCH SEARCHING BY STREET ADDRESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select “Street Address”. SEARCHING BY POINT OF INTEREST Enter a house number and select “OK”. There are 4 methods to search for a destination by Points of Interest. Enter a street name and select “OK”. 1 Display the “Destination” screen. Select the desired street name. Enter a city name and select “OK”. Select the desired city name. (P. 88) 2 Select “Point of Interest”. 3 Select the desired search method.  If the same address exists, the address list screen will be displayed. Select the desired address. INFORMATION ●A street name can be searched using only the body part of its name. For example: S WESTERN AVE • A search can be performed by entering “S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE” or “WESTERN”. No. * Function Page Select to search by name. 93 Select to search by category. 94 Select to search by phone number. 95 Select to search by eDestination. 402 *: This function is not made available on some models. 92 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. DESTINATION SEARCH ■ SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH SEARCHING BY NAME 1 Select “Name”. 2 Enter a POI name and select “OK”. 3 Select the desired POI. 1 Select “City”. 2 Enter a city name and select “OK”. “Any City”: Select to cancel the city setting. 3 Select the desired city name. 4 Select the desired POI. 3 1 Select “Category”. 2 Select the desired category. No. Function Page Select to search for POI in the desired city. 93 Select to search for POI from the category list. 93 Select to search for POI using online database. 94  If there is more than 1 detailed item of the selected category, the detailed list will be displayed. “List All Categories”: Select to display all POI categories. 3 Select the desired POI.  When entering the name of a specific POI, and there are 2 or more sites with the same name, the list screen will be displayed. Select the desired POI. INFORMATION ●To search for a facility name using multiple search words, put a space between each word. 93 LS460_600h_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM ■ SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES 2. DESTINATION SEARCH ■ SEARCHING FOR POI USING WEB SEARCH* 1 Select “” next to “Web Search” to select a search engine. 2 Select the desired search engine icon.  The selected search engine icon will be displayed on the top center of the POI list screen. 3 Select the search engine icon. SEARCHING BY CATEGORY 1 Select “Category”. 2 Select the desired search point. No. Function Select to set the search point from near the current position. Select to search for POIs along the set route.  Accessing to a search engine For the procedure on how to conduct a search via a search engine, go to “SETTING A DESTINATION USING LEXUS App Suite” (P. 398), and follow the steps from 3 onward. Select to set the search point from near a city center. (P. 95) Select to set the search point from near a destination. When more than 1 destination has been set, a list will be displayed on the screen. Select the item to be set. *: This function is not made available on some models. 94 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. DESTINATION SEARCH 3 Select the desired POI category.  If there is more than 1 detailed item of the selected category, the detailed list will be displayed. 4 Select the desired POI. “Web Search”: Select to search for POI using online database. (P. 94) INFORMATION ●The names of POIs located within approximately 200 miles (320 km) from the selected search point can be displayed. 1 Select “Near a City Center in XX”. 2 Enter a city name and select “OK”. “Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name from the list of the last 5 cities. 3 Select the desired city name. 4 Select “OK” when the city center map screen is displayed. 5 Follow the steps from 3 onward in “SEARCHING BY CATEGORY”. (P. 94) *: XX represents the selected search area name. INFORMATION ●If the navigation system has never been used, selecting the city name from “Last 5 Cities” will not be available. SEARCHING BY PHONE NUMBER 1 Select “Phone #”. 2 Enter a phone number and select “OK”.  If there is more than 1 site with the same number, the list screen will be displayed. INFORMATION ●If there is no match for the entered phone number, a list of identical numbers with different area codes will be displayed. 95 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM “List All Categories”: Select to display all POI categories. “Favorite POI Categories”: Select to use the 6 POIs that have been previously set.(P. 127) When “Near a City Center in XX*” is selected 2. DESTINATION SEARCH DESTINATION SEARCH BY DESTINATION ASSIST* SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK The destination can be searched by calling an operator of Destination Assist. You can request either a specific business, address, or ask for help locating your desired destination. (P. 400) To use this function, it is necessary to register an address book entry. (P. 120) 1 Display the “Destination” screen. SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS 2 Select “Address Book”. 3 Select the desired address book entry. (P. 88) “Options”: Select to register or edit address book entries. (P. 121) 1 Display the “Destination” screen. (P. 88) 2 Select “Previous Destinations”. 3 Select the desired destination. “Previous Start Point”: Select to display the start point map of the previous guided route. “Delete”: Select to delete the previous destination. (P. 125) INFORMATION ●The previous start point and up to 100 previously set destinations are displayed on the screen. *: This function is not made available on some models. 96 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. DESTINATION SEARCH SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY 1 Display the “Destination” screen. (P. 88) INFORMATION ●The navigation system does not guide in areas where route guidance is unavailable. (P. 133) There are 2 methods to search for a destination by Intersection & Freeway. 1 Display the “Destination” screen. (P. 88) 2 Select “Intersection & Freeway”. 3 Select the desired method. No. Function Page Select to search by intersection. 98 Select to search by freeway entrance/exit. 98 97 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2 Select “Emergency”. 3 Select the desired emergency category. 4 Select the desired destination. SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION AND FREEWAY 2. DESTINATION SEARCH SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION 1 Select “Intersection”. 2 Enter the name of the first intersecting SEARCHING BY FREEWAY ENTRANCE/EXIT 3 Select the desired street name. 4 Enter the name of the second intersect- 1 2 3 4 5 5 Select the desired street name. 6 Select the desired entrance or exit street which is located near the destination and select “OK”. ing street and select “OK”.  If the 2 streets cross at more than 1 intersection in a city, the list of intersections will be displayed. 98 LS460_600h_Navi_U Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit”. Enter a freeway name and select “OK”. Select the desired freeway. Select “Entrance” or “Exit”. Enter a freeway entrance or exit name and select “OK”. name. INFORMATION ●Be sure to use the complete name of the freeway or highway, including the hyphen, when entering the destination. Freeways and interstates use an “I” (I-405). US highways use the state designation before the number (CA-118). 2. DESTINATION SEARCH SEARCHING BY MAP By selecting “Map” the last displayed location is displayed again on the map screen. You can search for a destination from this map. 1 Display the “Destination” screen. 2 Select “Map”. 3 Scroll the map to the desired point and 1 Display the “Destination” screen. (P. 88) 2 Select “Coordinates”. 3 Enter the latitude and longitude and select “OK”. select “Go to ”. “Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the position in smaller increments. (P. 79)  If a destination has already been set, “Go to ” and “Add to Route” will be displayed. “Go to ”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one. “Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.  The navigation system performs a search for the route and the entire route map is displayed. (P. 100) 99 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM (P. 88) SEARCHING BY COORDINATES 2. DESTINATION SEARCH 2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE When the destination is set, the confirm destination screen will be displayed. 1 Select “Go” on the confirm destination screen.  For details about this screen: P. 101 2 Select “OK” on the entire route map screen.  For details about this screen: P. 101 CAUTION ●Be sure to obey traffic regulations and keep road conditions in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been changed, the route guidance may not indicate such changed information. 100 LS460_600h_Navi_U INFORMATION ●The route for returning may not be the same as that for going. ●The route guidance to the destination may not be the shortest route or a route without traffic congestion. ●Route guidance may not be available if there is no road data for the specified location. ●When setting the destination on a map with a scale more than 0.5 mile (800 m), the map scale changes to 0.5 mile (800 m) automatically. If this occurs, set the destination again. ●If a destination that is not located on a road is set, the vehicle will be guided to the point on a road nearest to the destination. The road nearest to the selected point is set as the destination. 2. DESTINATION SEARCH CONFIRM DESTINATION SCREEN ENTIRE ROUTE MAP SCREEN 3 No. Function Select to adjust the position in smaller increments. (P. 79) Select to register as a memory point. Select to search for the route. (P. 100) If a destination has already been set, “Go Directly” and “Add to Route” will be displayed. “Go Directly”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one. “Add to Route”: Select to add a destination. Select to call the registered number. Information/Function Select the desired route from 3 possible routes. (P. 102) Select to change the route. (P. 104) Select to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination. (P. 103) Current position Destination point Type of route and its distance Distance of the entire route  Select to start guidance.  Select and hold to start demo mode. (P. 102) 101 LS460_600h_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM No. 2. DESTINATION SEARCH STARTING DEMO MODE Before starting the route guidance, the demonstration of the route guidance can be viewed. 3 ROUTES SELECTION 1 Select “Three Routes”. 2 Select the desired route. 1 Select and hold “OK” on the entire route map screen until a beep sounds.  During demo mode, “Demo” is displayed on the map screen.  To end demo mode: Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. No. Function Select to display the quickest route. Select to display the alternative route. Select to display the route that is the shortest distance to the set destination. Select to display the information about the 3 routes. (P. 103) 102 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. DESTINATION SEARCH ■ DISPLAYING 3 ROUTES INFORMATION 1 Select “Info”. 2 Check that the “Information for Three Routes” screen is displayed. A list of turn information from the current position to the destination can be displayed. 1 Select “Turn List”. 2 Check that the turn list is displayed. 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM No. DISPLAYING TURN LIST Information Time necessary for the entire trip Distance of the entire trip Distance of the toll road Distance of the freeway Distance of the ferry trip No. Information Current position Distance to the next turn Turn direction at the intersection Select to display the map of the selected point. INFORMATION ●However, not all road names on the route may appear on the list. If a road changes its name without requiring a turn (such as on a street that runs through 2 or more cities), the name change will not appear on the list. The street names will be displayed in order from the starting point, along with the distance to the next turn. 103 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. DESTINATION SEARCH EDITING ROUTE Destinations can be added, reordered or deleted, and conditions for the route to the destination can be changed. 1 Select “Edit Route”. 2 Select the desired item. No. Function Page Select to add destinations. 112 Select to delete destinations. 113 Select to reorder destinations. 112 Select to set route preferences. 113 Select to change route type. 113 INFORMATION ●Even if the “Freeways” indicator is dimmed, the route cannot avoid including a freeway in some cases. (P. 113) ●If the calculated route includes a trip by ferry, the route guidance shows a sea route. After traveling by ferry, the current position may be incorrect. Upon reception of GPS signals, it is automatically corrected. 104 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE 1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN During the route guidance, various types of guidance screens can be displayed depending on conditions. SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE CHANGING ROUTE INFORMATION BAR When the vehicle is on the guidance route, the route information bar displays the current street name or the distance with the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination. the route information button ( ) to change the display of the route information bar. No. Information Distance to the next turn and an arrow indicating the turning direction Guidance route Current position Current street name or route information INFORMATION ●If the vehicle goes off the guidance route, the route is searched again. ●For some areas, the roads have not been completely digitized in our database. For this reason, the route guidance may select a road that should not be traveled on. ●When arriving at the set destination the destination name will be displayed on the upper part of the screen. No. Information Select to change the display between the estimated travel time and the estimated arrival time. “Arrival Time”: Select to display the estimated arrival time. “Time to Dest.”: Select to display the estimated travel time. Select to change the display between the current street name and the distance with the estimated travel/arrival time. 105 LS460_600h_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1 Select the route information bar ( ) or 3 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE INFORMATION ●When the vehicle is on the guidance route, the distance measured along the route is displayed. Travel time and arrival time are calculated based on the average speed for the specified speed limit. ●When the vehicle gets off the guidance route, the arrow facing the destination is displayed instead of the estimated travel/ arrival time. ●The route information bar fills from left to right as the vehicle progresses on the route. DISTANCE AND TRAVEL/ ARRIVAL TIME When driving on the guidance route with more than 1 destination set, a list of the distance with estimated travel/arrival time from the current position to each destination is displayed. 1 Select the route information bar. 2 Check that the list of the distance and time is displayed.  By selecting one of the number buttons, the desired route information is displayed. 106 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE ROUTE OVERVIEW DURING FREEWAY DRIVING The entire route from the current position to the destination can be displayed during the route guidance. During freeway driving, the freeway information screen will be displayed. 1 Select on the map screen. 3 (P. 72) played.  For details about this screen: P. 101 No./ Icon Information/Function Distance and time from the current position to the road traffic facilities. Name of the road traffic facilities. POIs that are close to a freeway exit Select to display the selected map of the exit vicinity. Select to display the nearest road traffic facilities from the current position. Select to scroll to farther road traffic facilities. Select to scroll to closer road traffic facilities. INFORMATION ●When the map screen is set to full screen display, the freeway information screen will be displayed on the “Side Display”. 107 LS460_600h_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2 Select “Route Overview”. 3 Check that the entire route map is dis- 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE WHEN APPROACHING FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION When the vehicle approaches an exit or junction, the freeway guidance screen will be displayed. TOLLGATE GUIDANCE When the vehicle approaches a tollgate, the tollgate view will be displayed. No. No. Information/Function Next exit or junction name Distance from the current position to the exit or junction Select to hide the freeway guidance screen. To return to the freeway guidance screen, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. Remaining distance bar to the guidance point 108 LS460_600h_Navi_U Information/Function Distance from the current position to the tollgate Select to hide the tollgate guidance screen. To return to the tollgate guidance screen, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. Remaining distance bar to the guidance point 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE REAL FREEWAY JUNCTION VIEW When the vehicle approaches a junction, the junction view with signage will be displayed. WHEN APPROACHING INTERSECTION When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the intersection guidance screen will be displayed. 3 Information/Function Next junction or street name Select to hide the real freeway junction view. To return to the real freeway junction view, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. No. NAVIGATION SYSTEM No. Information/Function Next street name Select to hide the intersection guidance screen. To return to the intersection guidance screen, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. Distance from the current position to the next junction Distance to the intersection Remaining distance bar to the guidance point Remaining distance bar to the guidance point INFORMATION ●When the map screen is set to full screen display, the intersection guidance screen will be displayed on the “Side Display”. 109 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE TURN LIST SCREEN 1 Select “Turn List” on the “Map Mode” screen. (P. 78) 2 Check that the turn list screen is displayed. TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN On this screen, information about the next turn on the guidance route can be displayed. 1 Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” on the “Map Mode” screen. (P. 78) 2 Check that the turn-by-turn arrow screen is displayed. No. Information Turn direction Distance between turns Next street or destination name No. Information Exit number or street name INFORMATION ●When the map screen is set to full screen display, the turn list screen will be displayed on the “Side Display”. Turn direction Distance to the next turn INFORMATION ●When the map screen is set to full screen display, the turn-by-turn arrow screen will be displayed on the “Side Display”. 110 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE 2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS As the vehicle approaches an intersection, or point, where maneuvering the vehicle is necessary, the system’s voice guidance will provide various messages. CAUTION 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM ●Be sure to obey the traffic regulations and keep the road condition in mind especially when you are driving on IPD roads (roads that are not completely digitized in our database). The route guidance may not have the updated information such as the direction of a one way street. INFORMATION ●To hear a voice guidance command again if it cannot be heard, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. ●To adjust the voice guidance volume: P. 63 ●Voice guidance may be made early or late. ●If the system cannot determine the current position correctly, you may not hear voice guidance or may not see the magnified intersection on the screen. 111 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE 3. EDITING ROUTE 1 Select ADDING DESTINATIONS on the map screen. (P. 72) 1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112) 2 Select “Add”. 3 Search for an additional destination in 2 Select “Edit Route”. 3 Select the item to be set. the same way as a destination search. (P. 88) 4 Select “Add Destination Here” to insert the new destination into the route. No. Function Page Select to add destinations. 112 Select to delete destinations. 113 Select to reorder destinations. 112 Select to set route preferences. 113 Select to change route type. 113 Select to set detours. 114 Select to start from adjacent road. 115 4 Check that the entire route map is displayed. (P. 101) 112 LS460_600h_Navi_U REORDERING DESTINATIONS When more than 1 destination has been set, the arrival order of the destinations can be changed. 1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112) 2 Select “Reorder”. 3 Select the desired destination and se- lect “Move Up” or “Move Down” to change the arrival order. Then select “OK”. 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE DELETING DESTINATIONS 1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112) 2 Select “Delete”. 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. “Delete All”: Select to delete all destinations on the list.  If more than 1 destination has been set, the system will recalculate the route(s) to the set destination(s) as necessary. The conditions to determine the route can be selected from various choices such as freeways, toll roads, ferries, etc. 1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112) 2 Select “Preferences”. 3 Select the desired route preferences and select “OK”.  When set to on, the indicator will illuminate. SELECTING ROUTE TYPE 1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112) 2 Select “Route Type”. 3 Select the desired route type and select “OK”.  During driving, the route guidance starts after selecting the desired route type. 4 The entire route from the starting point to the destination is displayed.  For details about this screen: P. 101 113 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM  When more than 1 destination has been set, a list will be displayed on the screen. Select the item(s) to be deleted. SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE DETOUR SETTING INFORMATION During the route guidance, the route can be changed to detour around a section of the route where a delay is caused by road repairs, an accident, etc. 1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112) 2 Select “Detour”. 3 Select the desired detour distance. No. Function Select to detour within 1 mile of the current position. Select to detour within 3 miles of the current position. Select to detour within 5 miles of the current position. Select to detour on the entire route. * Select to make the system search for the route based on traffic congestion information received from traffic information. (P. 85) *: This function is not made available on some models. 114 LS460_600h_Navi_U ●This picture shows an example of how the system would guide around a delay caused by a traffic jam. This position indicates the location of a traffic jam caused by road repairs, an accident, etc. This route indicates the detour suggested by the system. ●When the vehicle is on a freeway, the detour distance selections are 5, 15 and 25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are in km). ●The system may not be able to calculate a detour route depending on the selected distance and surrounding road conditions. 3. ROUTE GUIDANCE STARTING FROM ADJACENT ROAD When a freeway and a surface road run in parallel, the system may show the guidance route going on the freeway while driving on the surface road, or vice versa. If this happens, you can instantly choose the adjacent road for the route guidance. 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112) 2 Select “Start from Adjacent Road”. INFORMATION ●When there is no adjacent road, this screen button will not be displayed. 115 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4. MEMORY POINTS 1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS Home, preset destinations, address book entries, areas to avoid can be set as memory points. The registered points can be used as the destinations. (P. 88) Registered areas to avoid, will be avoided when the system searches for a route. 4 Select the desired item to be set. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Navigation”. 116 LS460_600h_Navi_U No. Function Page Select to set home. 117 Select to set preset destinations. 118 Select to set the address book. 120 Select to set areas to avoid. 123 Select to delete previous destinations. 125 Select to set detailed navigation settings. 126 4. MEMORY POINTS EDITING HOME SETTING UP HOME If home has been registered, that information can be recalled by selecting “Go Home” on the “Destination” screen. (P. 90) 1 Select “Edit”. 2 Select the desired item to be edited. 3 1 Display the “Navigation Settings” 2 Select “Home”. 3 Select the desired item to be set. No. No. Function Page Select to register home. 117 Select to edit home. 117 Select to delete home. 117 REGISTERING HOME 1 Select “Set Home Location”. 2 Select the desired item to search for the location. (P. 88) 3 Select “OK” when the editing home Function Page Select to edit the home name. 122 Select to set display of the home name on/off.  Select to edit location information. 122 Select to edit the phone number. 122 Select to change the icon to be displayed on the map screen. 121 3 Select “OK”. DELETING HOME 1 Select “Delete”. 2 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. screen appears. 117 LS460_600h_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM screen. (P. 116) 4. MEMORY POINTS REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS SETTING UP PRESET DESTINATIONS If a preset destination has been registered, that information can be recalled by using preset destinations on the “Destination” screen. (P. 90) 1 Display the “Navigation Settings” screen. (P. 116) 1 Select “Set”. 2 Select the desired item to search for the location. (P. 88) 3 Select a position for this preset destination. 4 Select “OK” when the editing preset destination screen appears. (P. 119) 2 Select “Preset Destinations”. 3 Select the desired item. INFORMATION ●Up to 5 preset destinations can be registered. No. Function Page Select to register a preset destination. 118 Select to edit a preset destination. 119 Select to delete a preset destination. 119 118 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4. MEMORY POINTS EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS DELETING PRESET DESTINATIONS 1 Select “Edit”. 2 Select the desired preset destination. 3 Select the item to be edited. 1 Select “Delete”. 2 Select the preset destination to be deleted and select “Delete”. 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation No. Function Page Select to edit the preset destination name. 122 Select to set display of the preset destination name on/off.  Select to edit location information. 122 Select to edit the phone number. 122 Select to change the icon to be displayed on the map screen. 121 NAVIGATION SYSTEM screen appears. 4 Select “OK”. 119 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 4. MEMORY POINTS SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK Points on the map can be registered. 1 Display the “Navigation Settings” screen. (P. 116) REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES 1 Select “New”. 2 Select the desired item to search for the location. (P. 88) 2 Select “Address Book”. 3 Select the desired item. 3 Select “OK” when the editing address book entry screen appears. (P. 121) INFORMATION ●Up to 100 address book entries can be registered. No. Function Page Select to register address book entries. 120 Select to edit address book entries. 121 Select to delete address book entries. 122 120 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4. MEMORY POINTS ■ CHANGING THE ICON EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES The icon, name, location and/or phone number of a registered address book entry can be edited. 1 Select “Edit” next to the “Icon”. 2 Select the desired icon. 1 Select “Edit”. 2 Select the desired address book entry. 3 Select the item to be edited. 3 “With Sound”: Select the memory points with a sound When the “With Sound” tab is selected No. Function Page Select to edit the address book entry name. 122 Select to set display of the address book entry name on/off.  Select to edit location information. 122 Select to edit the phone number. 122 Select to change the icon to be displayed on the map screen. 121 A sound for some address book entries can be set. When the vehicle approaches the location of the address book entry, the selected sound will be heard. 1 Select the “With Sound” tab. 2 Select the desired sound icon. : Select to play the sound.  When “Bell (with Direction)” is selected, select an arrow to adjust the direction and select “OK”. INFORMATION ●The bell sounds only when the vehicle approaches this point in the direction that has been set. 4 Select “OK”. 121 LS460_600h_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM  Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”, “Page 2” or “With Sound” tab. 4. MEMORY POINTS ■ CHANGING THE NAME 1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”. 2 Enter a name and select “OK”. ■ CHANGING THE LOCATION 1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”. 2 Scroll the map to the desired point (P. 79) and select “OK”. ■ CHANGING PHONE NUMBER 1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”. 2 Enter the phone number and select “OK”. 122 LS460_600h_Navi_U DELETING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES 1 Select “Delete”. 2 Select the item to be deleted and select “Delete”. 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 4. MEMORY POINTS REGISTERING AREAS TO AVOID SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID Areas to be avoided because of traffic jams, construction work or other reasons can be registered as “Areas to Avoid”. screen. (P. 116) location. (P. 88) 3 Select either or to change the size of the area to be avoided and select “OK”. 2 Select “Areas to Avoid”. 3 Select the desired item. 4 Select “OK” when the editing area to avoid screen appears. No. Function Page Select to register areas to avoid. 123 Select to edit areas to avoid. 124 Select to delete areas to avoid. 124 INFORMATION ●If a destination is entered in the area to avoid or the route calculation cannot be made without running through the area to avoid, a route passing through the area to be avoided may be shown. ●Up to 10 locations can be registered as points/areas to avoid. 123 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1 Display the “Navigation Settings” 1 Select “New”. 2 Select the desired item to search for the 4. MEMORY POINTS EDITING AREAS TO AVOID The name, location and/or area size of a registered area can be edited. ■ CHANGING THE NAME 1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”. 2 Enter a name and select “OK”. ■ CHANGING THE LOCATION 1 Select “Edit”. 2 Select the area and select “OK”. 3 Select the item to be edited. 1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”. 2 Scroll the map to the desired point (P. 79) and select “OK”. ■ CHANGING THE AREA SIZE 1 Select “Edit” next to “Size”. 2 Select either or to change the size of the area to be avoided and select “OK”. No. Function Page Select to edit the name of the area to avoid. 124 Select to set display of the area to avoid name on/off.  Select to edit area location. 124 Select to edit area size. 124 Select to set the area to avoid function on/off.  4 Select “OK”. 124 LS460_600h_Navi_U DELETING AREAS TO AVOID 1 Select “Delete”. 2 Select the area to be deleted and select “Delete”. 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 4. MEMORY POINTS DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS Previous destinations can be deleted. 1 Display the “Navigation Settings” screen. (P. 116) 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2 Select “Delete Previous Dest.”. 3 Select the previous destination to be deleted and select “Delete”. 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 125 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5. SETUP 1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS Settings are available for pop-up information, favorite POI categories, low fuel warning, etc. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 3 4 5 Select “Setup”. Select “Navigation”. Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”. Select the items to be set. 126 LS460_600h_Navi_U SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS 5. SETUP No. Function Page  Select to set display of popup information on/off.  Select to set favorite POI categories that are used for POI selection to display on the map screen. 127 Select to set display of low fuel warning on/off. 128 Select to set IPD road guidance on/off.  Select to set the voice guidance for the next street name on/off.  Select to set display of the 3D city model map on/off.  Select to change the viewing angle of the 3D map. 128 Select to adjust the current position mark manually or to adjust miscalculation of the distance caused by tire replacement. 129 Select to reset all setup items.  Up to 6 POI icons, which are used for selecting POIs on the map screen, can be selected as favorites. 1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings” 3 2 Select “Favorite POI Categories”. 3 Select the category to be changed. NAVIGATION SYSTEM Select to set the automatic screen button hiding function on/off. When set to on, certain screen buttons on the map screen will disappear several seconds after the Remote Touch has been operated. When set to off, all the screen buttons will always be displayed. FAVORITE POI CATEGORIES (SELECT POI ICONS) screen. (P. 126) “Default”: Select to set the default categories. 4 Select the desired POI category. “List All Categories”: Select to display all POI categories. 5 Select the desired POI icon. 127 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5. SETUP LOW FUEL WARNING When the fuel level is low, a warning message will pop up on the screen. 1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings” screen. (P. 126) 2 Select “Low Fuel Warning”. 3 Select “On” or “Off”. CHANGING VIEWING ANGLE OF 3D MAP 1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings” screen. (P. 126) 2 Select “3D Map Viewing Angle”. 3 Select “Up” or “Down” to change the viewing angle. ■ SEARCHING GAS STATION IN LOW FUEL WARNING A nearby gas station can be selected as a destination. 1 Select “Yes” when the low fuel warning appears. 2 Select the desired nearby gas station. 3 Select “Enter ” to set as a destination. “Info”: Select to display gas station information. (P. 83) 128 LS460_600h_Navi_U “Default”: Select to set the initial angle. 5. SETUP CURRENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION The current position mark can be adjusted manually. Miscalculation of the distance caused by tire replacement can also be adjusted. screen. (P. 126) 2 Select “Calibration”. 3 Select the desired item. 3 1 Select “Tire Change”.  The message appears and the quick distance calibration starts automatically. INFORMATION  For additional information on the accuracy of a current position: P. 132 ■ POSITION/DIRECTION BRATION The tire change calibration function will be used when replacing the tires. This function will adjust miscalculation caused by the circumference difference between the old and new tires. ●If this procedure is not performed when the tires are replaced, the current position mark may be incorrectly displayed. CALI- When driving, the current position mark will be automatically corrected by GPS signals. If GPS reception is poor due to location, the current position mark can be adjusted manually. 1 Select “Position / Direction”. 2 Scroll the map to the desired point (P. 79) and select “OK”. 3 Select an arrow to adjust the direction of the current position mark and select “OK”. 129 LS460_600h_Navi_U NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings” ■ TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION 5. SETUP 2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS* Traffic information such as traffic congestion or traffic incident warnings can be made available. SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC SETTINGS 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. No. Function Select to set the avoid traffic function auto/manual. (P. 131) 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Traffic”. 4 Select the items to be set. Select to set the usage of traffic information for the estimated arrival time on/off. Select to set the display of an arrow of free flowing traffic on/off. Select to set to on/off whether to consider the predictive traffic information (P. 86) with estimated arrival time and detoured route search. Select to set traffic incident voice warning on/off. Select to reset all setup items. *: This function is not made available on some models. 130 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5. SETUP AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC 1 Display the “Traffic Settings” screen. (P. 130) 2 Select “Avoid Traffic”. 3 Select the desired item. Function Select to automatically change routes when congestion information of the guidance route has been received. Select to select manually whether or not to change routes when congestion information of the guidance route has been received. In this mode, a screen will appear to ask if you wish to reroute. When the navigation system calculates a new route, the following screen will be displayed. 1 Select the desired item. No. 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM No. ■ CHANGING THE ROUTE MANUALLY Function Select to start route guidance using the new route. Select to confirm the new route and current route on the map. Select to continue the current route guidance. Select to not reroute when congestion information for the guidance route has been received. 131 LS460_600h_Navi_U 6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM 1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM This navigation system calculates the current position using satellite signals, various vehicle signals, map data, etc. However, an accurate position may not be shown depending on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances. The Global Positioning System (GPS) developed and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense provides an accurate current position, normally using 4 or more satellites, and in some case 3 satellites. The GPS system has a certain level of inaccuracy. While the navigation system compensates for this most of the time, occasional positioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m) can and should be expected. Generally, position errors will be corrected within a few seconds. 132 LS460_600h_Navi_U When the vehicle is receiving signals from satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the top left of the screen. The GPS signal may be physically obstructed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position on the map screen. Tunnels, tall buildings, trucks, or even the placement of objects on the instrument panel may obstruct the GPS signals. The GPS satellites may not send signals due to repairs or improvements being made to them. Even when the navigation system is receiving clear GPS signals, the vehicle position may not be shown accurately or inappropriate route guidance may occur in some cases. NOTICE ●The installation of window tinting may obstruct the GPS signals. Most window tinting contains some metallic content that will interfere with GPS signal reception of the antenna in the instrument panel. We advise against the use of window tinting on vehicles equipped with navigation systems. 6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM  If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals, the current position can be adjusted manually. For information on setting the current position calibration: P. 129  Inappropriate route guidance may occur in the following cases: • When turning at an intersection off the designated route guidance. • If you set more than 1 destination but skip any of them, auto reroute will display a route returning to the destination on the previous route. • When turning at an intersection for which 3 there is no route guidance. • When passing through an intersection for which there is no route guidance. • During auto reroute, the route guidance may not be available for the next turn to the right or left. • During high speed driving, it may take a long time for auto reroute to operate. In auto reroute, a detour route may be shown. • After auto reroute, the route may not be changed. • If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or announced. • If a location has multiple names and the system announces 1 or more of them. • When a route cannot be searched. • If the route to your destination includes gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the route guidance may not be shown. • Your destination point might be shown on the opposite side of the street. • When a portion of the route has regulations prohibiting the entry of the vehicle that vary by time, season or other reasons. • The road and map data stored in the navigation system may not be complete or may not be the latest version. NAVIGATION SYSTEM  Accurate current position may not be shown in the following cases: • When driving on a small angled Y-shaped road. • When driving on a winding road. • When driving on a slippery road such as in sand, gravel, snow, etc. • When driving on a long straight road. • When freeway and surface streets run in parallel. • After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier. • When a long route is searched during high speed driving. • When driving without setting the current position calibration correctly. • After repeating a change of direction by going forward and backward, or turning on a turntable in a parking lot. • When leaving a covered parking lot or parking garage. • When a roof carrier is installed. • When driving with tire chains installed. • When the tires are worn. • After replacing a tire or tires. • When using tires that are smaller or larger than the factory specifications. • When the tire pressure in any of the 4 tires is not correct.  After replacing a tire: P. 129 133 LS460_600h_Navi_U 6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM INFORMATION ●This navigation system uses tire turning data and is designed to work with factoryspecified tires for the vehicle. Installing tires that are larger or smaller than the originally equipped diameter may cause inaccurate display of the current position. The tire pressure also affects the diameter of the tires, so make sure that the tire pressure of all 4 tires is correct. 134 LS460_600h_Navi_U 6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA ABOUT THE MAP DATA Coverage areas and legal information can be displayed and map data can be updated. Map data for the navigation system is contained in a microSD card that is inserted in the microSD card slot located at the bottom of the audio control panel. Do not eject the microSD card, as doing so may deactivate the navigation system. 1 Select on the map screen. (P. 72) 2 Select “Map Data”. 3 Check that the map data screen is displayed. No. Function Map version Select to update map. Select to display map coverage areas. NOTICE ●Do not edit or delete the map data on the microSD card, as doing so may deactivate the navigation system. INFORMATION Select to display legal information. INFORMATION ●Map data updates are available for a fee. Contact your Lexus dealer for further information. ●microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD3C,LLC. 135 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM MAP INFORMATION 6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM 136 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 1 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 2 1 BASIC OPERATION 2. XM Satellite Radio...................................... 161 OVERVIEW................................................................. 161 1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 140 HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio ....................................... 163 2. SOME BASICS ......................................... 142 DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID .......................... 165 TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF ....................................................... 142 SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST.................................................................... 165 SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE ............. 143 DISC SLOT.................................................................. 144 IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS .............................................. 166 USB/AUX PORT ..................................................... 145 3. INTERNET RADIO ................................... 167 “Sound Settings” SCREEN ................................... 146 AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT................... 148 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM........................ 150 2 RADIO OPERATION 1. AM/FM RADIO.................................................. 151 3 4 5 6 LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO.............. 167 7 3 MEDIA OPERATION 1. CD.................................................................. 168 8 OVERVIEW................................................................ 168 OVERVIEW................................................................. 151 2. DVD................................................................. 171 9 PRESET BUTTON SCREEN .............................. 154 OVERVIEW.................................................................. 171 SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST.................................................................... 155 DVD OPTIONS ........................................................ 174 10 CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM ............... 155 RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM ...... 157 3. USB MEMORY.......................................... 176 OVERVIEW................................................................ 176 USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.......... 158 4. iPod ................................................................ 180 AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.................................................. 158 OVERVIEW............................................................... 180 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................... 160 iPod AUDIO ............................................................... 183 iPod VIDEO ................................................................ 183 137 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5. Bluetooth® AUDIO................................. 184 OVERVIEW................................................................ 184 7 CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE..... 188 LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO............. 188 6. AUX.............................................................. 189 1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES............................ 216 QUICK REFERENCE............................................ 216 OVERVIEW................................................................ 189 EXTERNAL OPTIONS......................................... 192 4 REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES 2. SOME BASICS.......................................... 219 USING THE REMOTE CONTROLLER..................................................... 219 AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS TURNING ON/OFF THE REAR ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM....................... 220 INSERTING MEDIA OR CONNECTING A DEVICE TO THE REAR PLAYER .................................. 222 1. STEERING SWITCHES.......................... 193 2. REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROLS............................................ 196 SELECTING THE SOUND MODE .............. 224 SELECTING THE SOURCE ............................. 225 OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FROM THE FRONT SEATS........................................... 227 5 SETUP 1. AUDIO SETTINGS .................................. 199 AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN............................ 199 6 TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 8 REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 1. AM/FM/SAT RADIO............................ 228 OVERVIEW.............................................................. 228 1. OPERATING INFORMATION ........ 204 RADIO......................................................................... 204 DVD PLAYER AND DISC ................................ 205 iPod.................................................................................. 210 FILE INFORMATION.............................................. 211 TERMS........................................................................... 213 ERROR MESSAGES.............................................. 215 138 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. CD ................................................................ 229 OVERVIEW............................................................... 229 1 2 3. VIDEO CD................................................. 232 OVERVIEW............................................................... 232 VIDEO CD OPTIONS........................................ 233 4. DVD (DVD VIDEO AND AVCHD DISC)................................... 235 OVERVIEW.............................................................. 235 9 SETUP FOR REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 3 1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT 4 SYSTEM SETTINGS............................ 272 DISPLAYING THE SETTING SCREEN...... 272 5 DVD VIDEO OPTIONS...................................... 237 AVCHD VIDEO OPTIONS ........................... 241 5. Blu-ray Disc (BD-Video AND BDAV)..................... 242 TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR 10 SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 6 OVERVIEW............................................................... 242 1. OPERATING INFORMATION......... 275 7 BD-VIDEO OPTIONS ......................................... 244 CAUTION SCREEN............................................. 276 BDAV OPTIONS................................................... 248 WHEN APPEARS ON THE SCREEN........................................................ 276 6. USB MEMORY........................................ 250 OVERVIEW.............................................................. 250 8 THE REMOTE CONTROLLER....................... 276 HEADPHONES....................................................... 277 9 7. iPod ............................................................... 253 VOLUME.................................................................... 277 OVERVIEW.............................................................. 253 COPYRIGHTS AND TRADEMARKS........ 278 iPod AUDIO ............................................................. 255 CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc PLAYER 10 AND DISCS .......................................................... 282 8. Bluetooth® AUDIO ................................ 256 OVERVIEW.............................................................. 256 SD CARD..................................................................... 291 A/V INPUT PORT ................................................. 296 Bluetooth® AUDIO............................................... 258 9. SD CARD ................................................... 259 SELECTING THE SD MODE.......................... 259 MUSIC......................................................................... 260 PICTURE .................................................................... 263 VIDEO/MOVIE....................................................... 266 VIDEO (SD AVCHD)....................................... 269 10. EXTERNAL DEVICES............................ 271 OVERVIEW................................................................ 271 139 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION 1. QUICK REFERENCE The audio control screen can be reached by the following methods: Using the instrument panel Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button. From the “Menu” screen Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” or “Media”. The audio functions can also be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. (P. 413) Some audio functions can also be operated from the rear seat. (P. 216) ■ CONTROL SCREEN 140 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION ■ CONTROL PANEL 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM Function Page Using the radio 151 Playing an audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc 168 Playing a DVD 171 Playing a USB memory 176 Playing an iPod® 180 Playing a Bluetooth® device 184 Using the AUX port 189 Using the steering wheel audio switches 193 Using the rear seat audio controls* 196 Audio system settings 199 Using the rear seat entertainment system* 216 *: If equipped INFORMATION ●The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the system. 141 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION 2. SOME BASICS This section describes some of the basic features of the audio/visual system. Some information may not pertain to your system. Your audio/visual system works when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF NOTICE ●To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio/visual system on longer than necessary when the engine is not running . CERTIFICATION CAUTION:  For vehicles sold in U.S.A.: Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  Laser products • USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. • THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD. 142 LS460_600h_Navi_U “PWR·VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/ visual system on and off. The system turns on in the last mode used. Turn this knob to adjust the volume. “RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to display screen buttons for the audio/visual system.  A function that enables automatic return to the previous screen from the audio/ visual screen can be selected. (P. 56) 1. BASIC OPERATION SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE REORDERING THE AUDIO SOURCE 1 Display the audio control screen. 1 Display the audio control screen. 2 Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” 2 Select “Source”. 3 Select “Reorder”. 4 Select the desired audio source then (P. 140) Using the instrument panel button is pressed, the audio source changes. (P. 140) “<<” or “>>” to reorder. 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM “RADIO” button: To change radio modes. “MEDIA” button: To change media modes. From the audio source selection screen 2 Select “Source”. 3 Select the desired source. INFORMATION ●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated. ●When there are two pages, select “ ” or “ ” to change the page. ●When “Rear” is selected, the rear seat entertainment system can be operated from the front seats. (P. 227) 143 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION DISC SLOT INSERTING A DISC EJECTING A DISC 1 Press the button and remove the disc. 1 Insert a disc into the disc slot. NOTICE  After insertion, the disc is automatically loaded. ●Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot. INFORMATION ●The player is intended for use with 4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only. ●When inserting a disc, gently insert the disc with the label facing up. 144 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION USB/AUX PORT There are 2 USB ports and an AUX port in the console box. 1 Open the console box, then open the INFORMATION ●There are grooves in the tray allowing audio devices and cellular phones to be connected to the sockets while they are on the tray in the console box. cover and connect a USB memory. 4  Turn on the power of the device if it is not turned on. 2 Close the console box. NOTICE ●Depending on the size and shape of the device that is connected to the system, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this may damage the device or the terminal, etc. 145 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ●If 2 devices are connected to the USB ports, depending on the devices, both may not be able to be recognized by the system at the same time. 1. BASIC OPERATION USING A 4-POLE AUX CABLE To view a video on an iPod video or External video, it is necessary to use a 4pole AUX cable to connect the portable audio device. When connecting a portable audio device to the AUX port, use a 4-pole AUX cable with a plug that matches the exact layout shown in the illustration. “Sound Settings” SCREEN 1 Display the audio control screen. (P. 140). 2 Select . 3 Select the desired tab to be set. Connected device (portable audio device, etc.) No. Left Right Ground Video audio audio  When using an iPod video, a cable that has a 4-pole AUX plug and a USB connector is necessary. Connect the plug and connector to the AUX and USB ports. INFORMATION ●If a 4-pole AUX cable with a different layout is used, audio and/or video may not be output properly. 146 LS460_600h_Navi_U Information Page Select to set the tone and balance. 147 Select to set the DSP control. 148 Select to change audio settings. 199 1. BASIC OPERATION TONE AND BALANCE desired item to be set. No. 4 Function Select “+” or “-” to adjust highpitched tones. Select “+” or “-” to adjust mid-pitched tones. Select “+” or “-” to adjust low-pitched tones. Select to adjust the sound balance between the front and rear speakers. Select to adjust the sound balance between the left and right speakers. 147 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM TONE: How good an audio program sounds is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid and bass. BALANCE: A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important. Keep in mind that when listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the volume of 1 group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another. 1 Select the “Sound” tab and select the 1. BASIC OPERATION DSP CONTROL 1 Select the “DSP” tab and select the de- AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT sired item to be set. SCREEN SIZE SETTINGS The screen size can be selected for each type of media. DVD video/iPod video/External video 1 Display the audio control screen. (P. 140) No. Function The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for increased vehicle noise. 2 Select “Options”. 3 Select “Wide”. 4 Select the desired item to be adjusted. This function can create a feeling of presence. No. Function Select to display a 4 : 3 screen, with either side in black. Select to enlarge the image horizontally and vertically to full screen. Select to enlarge the image by the same ratio horizontally and vertically. 148 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION The brightness, contrast, color and tone of the screen can be adjusted. DVD video/iPod video/External video 4 Select the desired item to be adjusted. Screen button Function “Color” “R” Select to strengthen the red color of the screen. “Color” “G” Select to strengthen the green color of the screen. “Tone” “+” Select to strengthen the tone of the screen. 4 “Tone” “-” Select to weaken the tone of the screen. “Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen the contrast of the screen. “Contrast” “-” Select to weaken the contrast of the screen. “Brightness” “+” Select to brighten the screen. AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR AND TONE ADJUSTMENT “Brightness” “-” Select to darken the screen. 1 Display the audio control screen. (P. 140) 2 Select “Options”. 3 Select “Display”. INFORMATION ●Depending on the audio source, some functions may not be available. 149 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. BASIC OPERATION VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 1 Press this switch to operate the voice command system.  The voice command system and its list of commands can be operated. (P. 298) 150 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. RADIO OPERATION 1. AM/FM RADIO OVERVIEW The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143 ■ CONTROL SCREEN 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM When “Options” is selected 151 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. RADIO OPERATION ■ CONTROL PANEL No. Function Select to display HD) multicast channels available. (P. 158) Select to display the cache radio operation buttons. (P. 155) Select to display the radio preset buttons. (P. 154) Select to display a list of receivable stations. (P. 155) Select to store artist and song title information. (P. 159)  Select to scan for receivable stations.  When a program type is selected: Select to scan for receivable stations of the selected program type/channel category. Select to change the screen buttons (at the bottom of the screen) to the optional screen buttons. Select to seek a receivable station of the selected category. Select to display the “Type List” screen. (P. 157) Select to display text messages. Analog FM only: Select to display RBDS text messages. (P. 157) Select to turn HD Radio mode on/off. When the “HD Radio” indicator is off, the station list shows only analog broadcasts. Select to change the screen buttons (at the bottom of the screen) back to the standard screen buttons. 152 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. RADIO OPERATION No. Function  Turn to step up/down frequencies.  Turn to move up/down the list. Cache radio only: Press to turn mute on/off.  Press to select a preset station.  Press and hold to seek for a station. INFORMATION 4 ●The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 153 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. RADIO OPERATION PRESET BUTTON SCREEN Two preset button screens are available: the “Mixed Presets” screen and “Individual Presets” screen. On the “Mixed Presets” screen, preset stations for all radio modes (AM, FM and XM Satellite Radio modes) are displayed together. On the “Individual Presets” screen, only preset stations for the current radio mode are displayed. 1 Select “Presets”. 2 Select the desired item. INFORMATION ●On the “Mixed Presets” screen, up to 36 stations (6 stations per page x 6 pages) can be set as presets. On the “Individual Presets” screen, up to another 12 AM stations, 12 FM stations, and 12 XM Satellite Radio stations can be set as presets. (Maximum 72 stations) PRESETTING A STATION 1 Tune in the desired station. 2 Select “Presets”. 3 Select “add new”.  To change the preset station to a different one, select and hold the preset station. 4 Select “Yes” on the confirmation screen. 5 Select “OK” after setting the new preset station. INFORMATION No. Function Select to tune in to the desired preset station/channel. Select to change to the “Individual Presets” screen. (On the “Individual Presets” screen, select “Mixed Presets” to change to the “Mixed Presets” screen. Select to display the control screen. 154 LS460_600h_Navi_U ●The number of preset radio stations displayed on the screen can be changed. (P. 200) 2. RADIO OPERATION SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST 1 Select “Station List”. 2 FM radio only: Select the desired pro- CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM A radio program can be cached and played back in a time-shifted manner. gram type. 3 Select the desired station. “Info”: Select to display the control screen. ■ REFRESHING THE STATION LIST screen and the following screen will be displayed. “Cancel Refresh”: Select to cancel the refresh. “Source”: Select to change to another audio source while refreshing. The broadcast cached in the program cache can be played back manually. 1 Select on the right side of the screen. INFORMATION ●The audio system sound is muted during refresh operation. ●In some situations, it may take some time to update the station list. 155 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 1 Select “Refresh” on the “Station List” PLAYING BACK THE CACHE MANUALLY 2. RADIO OPERATION 2 Select the desired cache radio operation button. AUTOMATIC PLAYBACK OF THE CACHE If the radio broadcast is interrupted by another audio output, such as an incoming phone call, the system will automatically cache the interrupted portion and perform time-shift playback when the interruption ends. To manually operate the cache operation: (P. 155) No. Function Select: Skips backward 2 minutes Select and hold: Fast rewinds continuously Returns to the live radio broadcast Pauses the playback (To restart, select ) Select: Skips forward 2 minutes Select and hold: Fast forwards continuously Hides the cache operation buttons Red vertical bar: Shows what portion of the cached broadcast is currently playing Light blue bar: Shows time in which cache writing is in progress 156 LS460_600h_Navi_U INFORMATION ●The system can store up to 10 minutes. Cached data will be erased when the radio mode or station is changed or when the audio system is turned off. ●If noise or silence occurs during the caching process, cache writing will continue, with the noise or silence recorded as is. In this case, the cached broadcast will contain the noise or silence when played back. 2. RADIO OPERATION RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM SELECTING A DESIRED PROGRAM TYPE 1 Select “Options”. 2 Select “Type”. 3 Select to select a program type/channel 4 Select “TYPE SEEK” and the system will start to seek for stations in the relevant program type/channel category. INFORMATION ●If no relevant program can be found, “no type” will appear on the screen. category. 157 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM This audio system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS). RBDS mode allows text messages to be received from radio stations that utilize RBDS transmitters. When RBDS is on, the radio can — only select stations of a particular program type, — display messages from radio stations, — search for a stronger signal station. RBDS features are available only when listening to an FM station that broadcasts RBDS information and the “FM Info” indicator is on.  Once a program type has been set, “TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen.  The program list is in the following order: • “Classical” • “Country” • “EasyLis” (Easy Listening) • “Inform” (Information) • “Jazz” • “News” • “Oldies” • “Other” 4 • “Pop Music” • “Religion” • “Rock” • “R&B” (Rhythm and Blues) • “Sports” • “Talk” • “Traffic” (Not available when “HD Radio” indicator is off.) • “Alert” (Emergency Alert) 2. RADIO OPERATION USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives. Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com. HD Radio features included in Lexus radios:  Digital Sound  HD Radio broadcasts deliver crystal-clear, digital audio quality to listeners.  HD2/HD3 Channels  FM stations can provide additional digital only audio programming with expanded content and format choices on HD2/HD3 channels.  PSD  Program Service Data (PSD) gives you on-screen information such as artist name and song title.  iTunes Tagging  Listeners can tag (store) songs they like for later review and purchase through iTunes.  Artist Experience  Images related to the broadcast are displayed on the radio screen, such as album cover art and station logos. 158 LS460_600h_Navi_U HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY MULTICAST On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have “multiple” or supplemental programs on one FM station. 1 Select the “HD)” logo. 2 Select the desired channel.  Turning the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob can also select the desired multicast channel. 2. RADIO OPERATION PRESERVING A MUSIC INFORMATION Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in the system and transmits to an iPod. 1 Select “Tag” to bookmark the music information. 2 Connect an iPod. (P. 145) ●The tag information can not be preserved while scanning or caching the radio station. ●If tagging the music information fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag the information again. ●HD Radio™ stations can be preset. ●An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be displayed on the screen when in digital. The “HD)” logo will first appear in a gray color indicating the station is indeed (an analog and) a digital station. Once the digital signal is acquired, the logo will change to a bright orange color. ●The song title, artist name and music genre will appear on the screen when available by the radio station. In addition, radios stations may send album cover pictures when available. ●As a user works through the analog radio stations, (where applicable) the radio receiver will automatically tune from an analog signal to a digital signal within 5 seconds. 159 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.  Once an iPod is connected, the music tag moves from the radio into the iPod.  When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the “tagged” information of the songs which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had been listened to on their radio. INFORMATION 2. RADIO OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Experience Cause Action Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a short period of programming replayed or an echo, stutter or skip. The radio stations analog and digital volume is not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode. None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact the radio station. Sound fades, blending in and out. Radio is shifting between analog and digital audio. Reception issue, may clear-up as the vehicle continues to be driven. Turning the indicator of the “HD Radio” button off can force radio in an analog audio. Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3 multicast channel had been playing. The radio does not have access to digital signals at the moment. This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new station. Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel preset. The digital multicast content is not available until HD Radio™ broadcast can be decoded and make the audio available. This takes up to 7 seconds. This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to become available. Text information does not match the present song audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/ report_radio_station_experiences. No text information shown for the present selected frequency. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/ report_radio_station_experiences. 160 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. RADIO OPERATION 2. XM Satellite Radio OVERVIEW The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143 ■ CONTROL SCREEN 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ■ CONTROL PANEL 161 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. RADIO OPERATION No. Function Select to display the radio preset buttons. (P. 154) Select to display a receivable channel list. (P. 165) Select to scan for receivable channels of the selected program type/channel category. Select to display the “Type List” screen. (P. 157) Select to display text messages.  Turn to step up/down channels.  Turn to move up/down the list.  Press to select a preset channel.  Press and hold to seek for a channel. 162 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. RADIO OPERATION HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio HOW TO SUBSCRIBE It is necessary to enter into a separate service agreement with XM Satellite Radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle and digital satellite tuner.  For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to XM Satellite Radio:  U.S.A. Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-447-0011. Canada Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677. ●XM Radio Services Legal Disclaimers and Warnings • Fees and Taxes  Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada) XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. Explicit Language Notice Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at; U.S.A. Customers: Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-447-0011 Canadian Customers: Visit www.siriusxm.ca or calling 1-877-438-9677 ●It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. ●Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices. 163 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in the vehicle, a subscription to the XM Satellite Radio service is necessary. An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous U.S. states and some Canadian provinces. NOTICE 2. RADIO OPERATION INFORMATION ●XM Radio Services Descriptions • Radio and Entertainment XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is available online at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). ●XM Radio Services  Subscription Instructions • For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following paragraph shall be included. Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement available at (U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.com www.siriusxm.ca (Canada) XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.  2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more information is available at: U.S.A. Customers: Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-447-0011 Canadian Customers: Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 164 LS460_600h_Navi_U INFORMATION ●XM Satellite Radio is solely responsible for the quality, availability and content of the satellite radio services provided, which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM Satellite Radio customer service agreement. ●Customers should have their radio ID ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “Ch 000” on the radio. For details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID” below. ●All fees and programming are the responsibility of XM Satellite Radio and are subject to change. SATELLITE TUNER TECHNOLOGY NOTICE Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are awarded Type Approval Certificates from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility with the services offered by XM Satellite Radio. INFORMATION ●Satellite tuner The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio. 2. RADIO OPERATION DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID Each XM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. The radio ID is required when activating an XM service or when reporting a problem. 1 Select “Channel List”. 2 Select the desired channel category. 3 Select the desired channel. “Info”: Select to display the control screen. 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  If “Ch 000” is selected using the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and the specific radio code. SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST 165 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. RADIO OPERATION IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action. Message “Ck Antenna” “Ch Unauth” Explanation The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely. A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance. You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose “Ch 000” and all free-to-air channels. The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listen to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio. “No Signal” The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal. “Loading...” The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information. “Ch Off Air” The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel. ----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action is required. “Ch Unavail” The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. INFORMATION ●Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-447-0011 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677 (Canada). 166 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. RADIO OPERATION 3. INTERNET RADIO LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO* One of LEXUS App Suite’s features is the ability to listen to internet radio. In order to use this service, a compatible phone and the system needs to be set up. For details: P. 394 1 Display the audio source selection screen. (P. 143) button.  The internet radio application screen is displayed.  Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.  For the instrument panel operation method and the Remote Touch operation method: P. 143  By pressing the “RADIO” button, the “Audio” screen can be returned to. ●Other applications can be activated while listening to internet radio. ●An iPhone cannot be connected via Bluetooth® and USB connection at the same time. However, it is possible to recharge an iPhone while using applications by connecting via USB. The system uses the connection method that was used last. Therefore, if connected via USB after Bluetooth® connection, it is necessary to reconnect the iPhone via Bluetooth®. ●Some parts of applications can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel. ●For additional information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987. *: With navigation function 167 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 2 Select the desired application screen INFORMATION 3. MEDIA OPERATION 1. CD OVERVIEW The CD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143 Inserting a disc (P. 144) ■ CONTROL SCREEN Audio CD MP3/WMA/AAC disc ■ CONTROL PANEL 168 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION No. Function  Displays cover art  Select to display a track/file list.  Audio CD: Select to display a track list.  MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Select to display a folder list. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen. Select to set random playback. (P. 170) 4 Select to set repeat playback. (P. 170) AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  Select to select a track/file.  Select and hold to fast forward. Select to play/pause.  Select to select a track/file.  Select and hold to rewind. Select to select a folder.  Turn to select a track/file.  Turn to move up/down the list. Press to play/pause.  Press to select a track/file.  Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. INFORMATION ●If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA files can be played back. ●If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to 32 characters can be displayed. 169 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION REPEATING RANDOM ORDER The track/file or folder currently being listened to can be repeated. Tracks/files or folders can be automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select 1 Select . .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows:  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: Audio CD Audio CD • track repeat  off MP3/WMA/AAC disc • file repeat  folder repeat  off*1 • file repeat  off*2 1 * : When random playback is off *2: When random playback is on 170 LS460_600h_Navi_U • random (1 disc random)  off MP3/WMA/AAC disc • random (1 folder random)  folder random (1 disc random)  off 3. MEDIA OPERATION 2. DVD For safety reasons, the DVD video discs can only be viewed when the following conditions are met: (a) The vehicle is completely stopped. (b) The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. (c) The parking brake is applied. While driving in DVD video mode, only the DVD’s audio can be heard. The playback condition of some DVD discs may be determined by the DVD software producer. This DVD player plays a disc as the software producer intended. As such, some functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual that comes with the individual DVD disc. (P. 205) AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM OVERVIEW The DVD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143 Inserting a disc (P. 144) ■ CONTROL SCREEN 171 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 3. MEDIA OPERATION ■ CONTROL PANEL No. Function Select to display the menu control key. Select to display full screen video.  Select to select a chapter.  During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward. Select to play/pause. Select to stop the video screen.  Select to select a chapter.  Select and hold to rewind. Select to display the option screen. (P. 174) Select to display the menu screen. Select to display the password input screen. Turn to select a chapter. Press to play/pause.  Press to select a chapter.  Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. 172 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION CAUTION ●Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. The louder sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume. INFORMATION 173 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ●According to the DVD disc, some menu items can be selected directly. (For details, see the manual that comes with the DVD disc provided separately.) ●If appears on the screen when a control is selected, the operation relevant to the control is not permitted. 3. MEDIA OPERATION SEARCHING BY TITLE DVD OPTIONS 1 Select “Search”. 2 Enter the title number and select “OK”. 1 Select “Options”. 2 The following screen is displayed.  The player starts playing video for that title number. CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE 1 Select “Audio”. 2 Each time “Change” is selected, the auNo. Function Page Select to display the title search screen. 174 Select to display the predetermined scene on the screen and start playing.  Select to display the audio selection screen. 174 Select to display the subtitle selection screen. 175 Select to display the angle selection screen. 175 Select to change the screen size. 148 Select to display the image quality adjustment screen. 149 174 LS460_600h_Navi_U dio language is changed.  The languages available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc. 3. MEDIA OPERATION CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE 1 Select “Subtitle”. 2 Each time “Change” is selected, the language the subtitles are displayed in is changed.  The languages available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc.  When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can be hidden. 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM CHANGING THE ANGLE The angle can be selected for discs that are multi-angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the screen. 1 Select “Angle”. 2 Each time “Change” is selected, the angle is changed.  The angles available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc. 175 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION 3. USB MEMORY OVERVIEW The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143 Connecting a USB memory (P. 145) ■ CONTROL SCREEN ■ CONTROL PANEL 176 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION No. Function  Displays cover art  Select to display a file/track list. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen. Select to display the play mode selection screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen. Select to set random playback. (P. 179) 4 Select to set repeat playback. (P. 179) AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  Select to select a file/track.  Select and hold to fast forward. Select to play/pause.  Select to select a file/track.  Select and hold to rewind. Select to select a folder/album.  Turn to select a file/track.  Turn to move up/down the list. Press to play/pause.  Press to select a file/track.  Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. 177 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION CAUTION ●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the USB memory while driving. NOTICE ●Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the system, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc. ●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player. ●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. ●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. INFORMATION ●If tag information exists, the file/folder names will be changed to track/album names. 178 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION REPEATING RANDOM ORDER The file/track or folder/album currently being listened to can be repeated. Files/tracks or folders/albums can be automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select 1 Select .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: When random playback is off  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • random (1 folder/album random)  folder/album random (all folder/album 4 random)  off AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM • file/track repeat  folder/album repeat  off . When random playback is on • file/track repeat  off 179 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION 4. iPod OVERVIEW The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143 Connecting an iPod (P. 145) ■ CONTROL SCREEN iPod audio iPod video ■ CONTROL PANEL 180 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION Function No. Video  Displays cover art  Select to display a track list. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.  Select to display the play mode selection screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen. Select to display the play mode selection screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen. Select to set random playback. (P. 183)  Select to set repeat playback. (P. 183)   Select to select a track.  Select and hold to fast forward.  Select to select a file.  Select and hold to fast forward. Select to play/pause. Select to play/pause.  Select to select a track.  Select and hold to rewind.  Select to select a file.  Select and hold to rewind.  Select to display full screen video.  Select to display the option screen. (P. 183)  Turn to select a track.  Turn to move up/down the list.  Turn to select a file.  Turn to move up/down the list. Press to play/pause. Press to play/pause.  Press to select a track.  Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.  Press to select a file.  Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. 181 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM Audio 3. MEDIA OPERATION CAUTION ●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the iPod while driving. NOTICE ●Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this may damage the iPod or the terminal, etc. ●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player. ●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. ●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal. INFORMATION ●The system can only output the sound while driving. ●When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its battery. ●Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard. ●Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P. 200) It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process. ●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume playing from the same point it was last used. ●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. ●For viewing videos from an iPod, it is necessary to set “Video Sound Input” to “A/V”. (P. 200) ●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system operation may become unstable. For known phone compatibility information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. ●The system may not function properly if a conversion adapter is used to connect a device. 182 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION iPod AUDIO iPod VIDEO REPEATING The track currently being listened to can be repeated. 1 Select To change to iPod video mode, select “Browse” on the iPod audio screen, then select the “Videos” tab and select the desired video file. iPod VIDEO OPTIONS . 1 Select “Options”. 2 Select the desired settings to change. RANDOM ORDER Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • track shuffle  album shuffle  off No. Function Page Select to change the screen size. 148 Select to display the image quality adjustment screen. 149 Select to change audio settings. 199 183 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • track repeat  off 3. MEDIA OPERATION 5. Bluetooth® AUDIO The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is played on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication. This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function. OVERVIEW The Bluetooth® audio operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143 Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be available and/or the screen may look differently than shown in this manual. Connecting a Bluetooth® audio device (P. 188) ■ CONTROL SCREEN 184 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION ■ CONTROL PANEL 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 185 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION No. Function  Displays cover art  Select to display a track list. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen. Select to display the portable device connection screen. (P. 188) Select to display the playlist screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen. Select to set random playback. (P. 188) Select to set repeat playback. (P. 188)  Select to select a track.  Select and hold to fast forward. Select to play/pause.  Select to select a track.  Select and hold to rewind. Select to select an album. Displays Bluetooth® device condition  Turn to select a track.  Turn to move up/down the list. Press to play/pause.  Press to select a track.  Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. 186 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION CAUTION NOTICE ●Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player. INFORMATION ●Depending on the Bluetooth® device that is connected to the system, the music may start playing when selecting while it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when selecting while it is playing. ●In the following conditions, the system may not function: • The Bluetooth® device is turned off. • The Bluetooth® device is not connected. • The Bluetooth® device has a low battery. ●It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is being played. ●For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it. ●If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® network when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable player. ●If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does not happen. Reconnect the portable player manually. ●Bluetooth® device information is registered when the Bluetooth® device is connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove the Bluetooth® audio information from the system. (P. 61) ●In some situations, sound output via the Bluetooth® audio system may be out of sync with the connected device or output intermittently. 187 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect to the Bluetooth® audio system while driving. ●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. ●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. 3. MEDIA OPERATION CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth® device with the system. Registering an additional device LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO REPEATING The track or album currently being listened to can be repeated. 1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth® 1 Select 2 For more information: P. 46  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • track repeat  album repeat  off audio control screen. Selecting a registered device 1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth® audio control screen. 2 For more information: P. 48 . RANDOM ORDER Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • album random  all track random  off 188 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION 6. AUX While driving, video will not be displayed. Only sound will be output. OVERVIEW The AUX operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143 Connecting a device to the AUX port (P. 145) ■ CONTROL SCREEN 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM When “External” is selected 189 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. MEDIA OPERATION ■ CONTROL PANEL Function No. AUX External Select to display the external operation screen.   Select to display full screen video.  Select to display the option screen. (P. 192)  Select to display the aux operation screen. Press to turn mute on/off. 190 LS460_600h_Navi_U Press to turn mute on/off. 3. MEDIA OPERATION CAUTION ●Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls while driving. NOTICE INFORMATION ●When connecting an external device that does not output an image, select “AUX”. If “External” is selected, an all-black (blank) screen will be displayed. ●If the source is changed between AUX and External while the system is operating, sound may not be output momentarily. 191 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ●Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to the system, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this may damage the portable audio device or the terminal, etc. ●Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal. ●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal. 3. MEDIA OPERATION EXTERNAL OPTIONS 1 Select “Options”. 2 Select the desired settings to change. No. Function Page Select to change the screen size. 148 Select to display the image quality adjustment screen. 149 192 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS 1. STEERING SWITCHES Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel. 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM No. Switch Volume control switch “ ” switch “MODE” switch Volume control switch Mode All Operation Function Press Volume up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Volume up/down continuously 193 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS “ ” switch Mode AM, FM SAT CD MP3/ WMA/AAC disc DVD USB iPod Bluetooth® audio 194 LS460_600h_Navi_U Operation Function Press Preset station up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Seek up/down continuously while the switch is being pressed Press Preset channel up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Type seek up/down Press and hold (1.5 sec. or more) Fast up/down Press Track up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press File up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press Chapter up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press File/Track up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press Track/File up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press Track up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind 4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS “MODE” switch Mode AM, FM, SAT, AUX Function Press Change audio modes Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Mute Press Change audio modes Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) 4 Pause *: With navigation function INFORMATION ●In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected APPS. 195 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM CD, MP3/ WMA/AAC disc, DVD, USB, iPod, Bluetooth® audio, APPS* Operation 4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS 2. REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROLS* Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the rear seat audio controls. No. Switch “TUNE/TRACK” switch “CH/FLD” switch Display “PWR” switch “MODE” switch “VOL” switch *: If equipped 196 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS “TUNE/TRACK” switch Mode AM, FM SAT MP3/ WMA/AAC disc DVD USB iPod Bluetooth® audio Function Press Tune the frequency up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Seek up/down continuously while the switch is being pressed Press Select a channel Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast up/down Press Track up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press File up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press Chapter up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press File/Track up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press Track/File up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind Press Track up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM CD Operation 197 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS “CH/FLD” switch Mode Operation Function AM, FM, SAT Press Preset station/channel up/down MP3/ WMA/AAC disc Press Folder up/down USB Press Folder/Album up/down Bluetooth® audio Press Album up/down “PWR” switch Mode All Operation Function Press Audio system on/off Press and hold (3 sec. or more) Control panel illumination on the rear armrest on/off “MODE” switch Mode All Operation Function Press Change audio modes Press and hold (3 sec. or more) Lock/Unlock the buttons on the rear armrest “VOL” switch Mode All Operation Function Press Volume up/down Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Volume up/down continuously INFORMATION ●In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected APPS. 198 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5. SETUP 1. AUDIO SETTINGS Detailed audio settings can be programmed. AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 4 No. * Page Select to set the iPod audio signal input settings. 200 Select to set the video signal format settings. 200 Select to change the number of preset radio stations displayed on the screen. 200 Select to set detailed cover art settings. 200 Select to set detailed DVD settings. 201 *: Only in DVD video mode 199 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Audio”. 4 Select the desired item to be set. Function 5. SETUP iPod SETTINGS COVER ART SETTINGS 1 Display the audio setting screen. 1 Display the audio setting screen. 2 Select “iPod Settings”. 3 Select “Video Sound Input”. 4 Select a screen button for the desired 2 Select “Cover Art Settings”. 3 Select the desired button to be set. (P. 199) (P. 199) setting. EXTERNAL VIDEO SETTINGS 1 Display the audio setting screen. (P. 199) 2 Select “External Video Settings”. 3 Select “Video Signal Switch”. 4 Select a screen button for the desired setting. SETTING THE NUMBER OF RADIO PRESETS 1 Display the audio setting screen. (P. 199) 2 Select “Number of Radio Presets”. 3 Select the button with the desired num- No. Function Select on/off to set the cover art display in DISC mode. Select on/off to set the cover art display in USB mode. Select on/off to set the priority of the Gracenote database in USB mode. Select on/off to set the cover art display in iPod mode. Select on/off to set the priority of the Gracenote database in iPod mode. ber to be displayed.  “Default”: Select to default the settings. INFORMATION ●Images from the Gracenote database displayed on the screen may be different from the actual cover art. 200 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5. SETUP DVD SETTINGS Page 1 Display the audio setting screen. Select to change the audio language. 202 2 Select “DVD Settings”. 3 Select the items to be set. Select to change the subtitle language. 202 Select to change the language of the DVD video menu. 202 Select to set the angle mark on/off.  Select to set the parental lock. 202 Select to set the auto start playback on/off. Discs that are inserted while the vehicle is in motion will automatically start playing. Certain discs may not play.  Select to set a dynamic range. 202 Select to initialize all menus.  201 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM Function (P. 199) No. 5. SETUP ■ AUDIO LANGUAGE ■ PARENTAL LOCK 1 Select “Audio Language”. 2 Select the desired language to be 1 Select “Parental Lock”. 2 Enter the 4-digit personal code. 3 Select a parental level (1-8). heard.  If the desired language to be heard cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. (P. 203) ■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE 1 Select “Subtitle Language”. 2 Select the desired language to be read.  If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. (P. 203) ■ MENU LANGUAGE 1 Select “Menu Language”. 2 Select the desired language to be read.  If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. (P. 203) 202 LS460_600h_Navi_U ■ SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can be adjusted. 1 Select “Dynamic Range”. 2 Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”. 5. SETUP LANGUAGE CODES LIST Code Language Code Language 0514 English 0515 Esperanto Code Language 1214 Lingala Code Language 1913 Samoan 1001 Japanese 0520 Estonian 1215 Laotian 1914 Shona 0618 French 0521 Basque 1220 Lithuanian 1915 Somali 0405 German 0601 Persian 1222 Latvian, Lettish 1917 Albanian 0920 Italian 0609 Finnish 1307 Malagasy 1918 Serbian 0519 Spanish 0610 Fiji 1309 Maori 1919 Siswati 2608 Chinese 0615 Faroese 1311 Macedonian 1920 Sesotho Dutch 0625 Frisian 1312 Malayalam 1921 Sundanese Portuguese 0701 Irish 1314 Mongolian 1923 Swahili 1922 Swedish 0704 Scottish-Gaelic 1315 Moldavian 2001 Tamil 1821 Russian 0712 Galician 1318 Marathi 2005 Telugu 1115 Korean 0714 Guarani 1319 Malay 2007 Tajik 0512 Greek 0721 Gujarati 1320 Maltese 2008 Thai 0101 Afar 0801 Hausa 1325 Burmese 2009 Tigrinya 0102 Abkhazian 0809 Hindi 1401 Nauru 2011 Turkmen 0106 Afrikaans 0818 Croatian 1405 Nepali 2012 Tagalog 0113 Amharic 0821 Hungarian 1415 Norwegian 2014 Setswana 0118 Arabic 0825 Armenian 1503 Occitan 2015 Tongan 0119 Assamese 0901 Interlingua 1513 (Afan) Oromo 2018 Turkish 0125 Aymara 0905 Interlingue 1518 Oriya 2019 Tsonga 0126 Azerbaijani 0911 Inupiak 1601 Punjabi 2020 Tatar 2023 Twi 0201 Bashkir 0914 Indonesian 1612 Polish 0205 Byelorussian 0919 Icelandic 1619 Pashto, Pushto 2111 Ukrainian 0207 Bulgarian 0923 Hebrew 1721 Quechua 2118 Urdu 0208 Bihari 1009 Yiddish 1813 Rhaeto-Romance 2126 Uzbek 0209 Bislama 1023 Javanese 1814 Kirundi 2209 Vietnamese 0214 Bengali, Bangla 1101 Georgian 1815 Romanian 2215 Volapük 0215 Tibetan 1111 Kazakh 1823 Kinyarwanda 2315 Wolof 0218 Breton 1112 Greenlandic 1901 Sanskrit 2408 Xhosa 0301 Catalan 1113 Cambodian 1904 Sindhi 2515 Yoruba 0315 Corsican 1114 Kannada 1907 Sango 2621 Zulu 0319 Czech 1119 Kashmiri 1908 Serbo-Croatian 0325 Welsh 1121 Kurdish 1909 Sinhalese 0401 Danish 1125 Kirghiz 1911 Slovak 0426 Bhutani 1201 Latin 1912 Slovenian AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 1412 1620 4 203 LS460_600h_Navi_U 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 1. OPERATING INFORMATION NOTICE ●To avoid damage to the audio/visual system: • Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio/visual system. • Do not put anything other than an appropriate disc into the disc slot. INFORMATION ●The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio/visual system which you are listening to. However, this does not indicate a malfunction. RADIO Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is a problem with the radio — it is just the normal result of conditions outside the vehicle. For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception. Power lines or phone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range. The farther the vehicle is from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as the vehicle moves. Here, some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with the radio are described. 204 LS460_600h_Navi_U FM Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40 km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion. Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If this happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of reception. Static and fluttering: These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees or other large objects. Increasing the bass level may reduce static and fluttering. Station swapping: If the FM signal being listened to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, the radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again. 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM AM XM  Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.  Alternation or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the equipment.  This DVD player is intended for use with 4.7 in. (12 cm). discs only.  Extremely high temperatures can keep the DVD player from working. On hot days, use the air conditioning system to cool the inside of the vehicle before using the player.  Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make the DVD player skip.  If moisture gets into the DVD player, the 4 discs may not be able to be played. Remove the discs from the player and wait until it dries. CAUTION ●The DVD player uses an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly. 205 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper atmosphere — especially at night. These reflected signals can interfere with those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak. Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast. Static: AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening or electrical motors. This results in static. DVD PLAYER AND DISC 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM DVD PLAYER Special shaped discs Audio CDs DVD video discs Transparent/translucent discs DVD-R/RW discs  Use only discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable on your player: • SACD • dts CD • Copy-protected CD • DVD-Audio • Video CD • DVD-RAM 206 LS460_600h_Navi_U Low quality discs 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM Labeled discs Correct ●Do not use special shaped, transparent/ translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illustrations. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc. ●This system is not designed for use of Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs because they may cause damage to the player. ●Do not use discs with a protection ring. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc. ●Do not use printable discs. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc.  Handle discs carefully, especially when 4 inserting them. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.  Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)  Remove discs from the players when not in use. Store them in their plastic cases away from moisture, heat and direct sunlight. AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM NOTICE Wrong To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or anti-static device. 207 LS460_600h_Navi_U 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM CD-R/RW AND DVD-R/RW DISCS  CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a conventional CD player) cannot be played.  It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of the unit.  It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.)  CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play some damaged discs.  If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player, playback will begin more slowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.  Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played using the DDCD (Double Density CD) system. 208 LS460_600h_Navi_U DVD VIDEO DISCS This DVD player conforms to NTSC/ PAL color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to another format such as SECAM cannot be used. Region codes: Some DVD video discs have the following region code indicating which countries the DVD video disc can be played in on this DVD player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this player, error message appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a region code, there are cases when it cannot be used. Code ALL 1 Country All countries North America 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ■ MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEO DISCS NTSC/PAL Indicates NTSC/PAL format of color TV. Indicates the number of audio tracks. Indicates the number of language subtitles. Indicates the screen to be selected. Wide screen: 16:9 Standard: 4:3 Indicates a region code by which this video disc can be played. “ALL”: in all countries Number: region code DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopt- 4 ed. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby Digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help users enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video. Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with a level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes. AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM Indicates the number of angles. DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY • Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played. • Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movie can be played. • Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs can be played. 209 LS460_600h_Navi_U 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM Multi-angle feature: The same scene can be enjoyed from different angles. Multi-language feature: The subtitle and audio language can be selected. Region codes: The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player. For region codes: (P. 208) Audio: This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be played. Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter. Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title. Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. A title comprises of several chapters.  Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. iPod  “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”, and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.  Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.  iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.  The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPod touch (5th generation), and iPod nano (7th generation).  The 30-pin connector works with iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 4th generation), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1st through 6th generation).  USB works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 5th generation), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1st through 7th generation).  Bluetooth® technology works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, and iPod touch (2nd through 5th generation). 210 LS460_600h_Navi_U 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM COMPATIBLE MODELS The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system. Made for ■ COMPATIBLE USB DEVICES USB communication formats USB 2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps) File formats FAT 16/32 Correspondence class Mass class ■ COMPATIBLE FILES Item Compatible file format (audio) storage COMPRESSED USB/iPod DISC MP3/WMA/AAC Folders in the device Maximum 3000 Maximum 192 Files in the device Maximum 9999 Maximum 255 Files per folder Maximum 255  INFORMATION ●Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system. 211 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM • iPod touch (5th generation)* • iPod touch (4th generation) • iPod touch (3rd generation) • iPod touch (2nd generation) • iPod touch (1st generation) • iPod classic • iPod with video • iPod nano (7th generation)* • iPod nano (6th generation) • iPod nano (5th generation) • iPod nano (4th generation) • iPod nano (3rd generation) • iPod nano (2nd generation) • iPod nano (1st generation) • iPhone 5s* • iPhone 5c* • iPhone 5* • iPhone 4S • iPhone 4 • iPhone 3GS • iPhone 3G • iPhone *: iPod video not supported FILE INFORMATION 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ■ CORRESPONDING FREQUENCY File type SAMPLING ■ COMPATIBLE CHANNEL MODES File type Frequency (kHz) Channel mode MP3 files Stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32/44.1/48 WMA files 2ch MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 16/22.05/24 AAC files 1ch, 2ch (Dual channel is not supported) WMA files: Ver. 7, 8, 9* (9.1/9.2) 32/44.1/48 AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC 11.025/12/16/ 22.05/24/32/ 44.1/48 *: Only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard ■ CORRESPONDING BIT RATES*1 File type Bit rate (kbps) MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32 - 320 MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 8 - 160 WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192 WMA files: Ver. 9*2 (9.1/9.2) CBR 48 - 320 AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC 8 - 320 *1: Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible *2: Only compatible with Windows Media Audio Standard 212 LS460_600h_Navi_U  MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) are audio compression standards.  This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC files on CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW discs and USB memory.  This system can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system and UDF (2.01 or lower).  When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file, add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/ .wma/.m4a).  This system plays back files with .mp3/ .wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/ AAC files respectively. To prevent noise and playback errors, use the appropriate file extension.  This system can play only the first session/ border when using multi session/border compatible discs.  MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. This system cannot display disc title, track title and artist name in other formats.  WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/ AAC tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry information such as track title and artist name.  The emphasis function is available only when playing MP3 files.  This system can play back AAC files encoded by iTunes. 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 001.mp3 002.wma Folder 1 003.mp3 Folder 2 004.mp3 005.wma Folder 3 006.m4a  The play order of the compact disc with the 4 structure shown above is as follows: 001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.m4a  The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC encoding software you use. TERMS PACKET WRITE  This is a general term that describes the process of writing data on-demand to CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is written to floppy or hard discs. ID3 TAG  This is a method of embedding trackrelated information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track number, track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments, cover art and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to a number of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. 213 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In order to achieve a reasonable level of sound quality, discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are recommended.  m3u playlists are not compatible with the audio player.  MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the audio player.  The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).  When playing back files recorded as VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used.  It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.  MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8 levels deep can be played. However, the start of playback may be delayed when using discs containing numerous levels of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 levels of folders. 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM WMA TAG  WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags carry information such as track title and artist name. ISO 9660 FORMAT  This is the international standard for the formatting of CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels of regulations.  Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8 character file names, with a 3 character file extension. File names must be composed of one-byte capital letters and numbers. The “_” symbol may also be included.)  Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark “.” and file extension). Each folder must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies. m3u  Playlists created using “WINAMP” software have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3  MP3 is an audio compression standard determined by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to about 1/10 the size of that on conventional discs. 214 LS460_600h_Navi_U WMA  WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio compression format developed by Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and 9. AAC  AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and MPEG4. 6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES Mode Message “No disc found.” It indicates that there is no disc in the DVD player. “Check disc” It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. It indicates a disc which is not playable is inserted. CD/DVD There is a trouble inside the system. Eject the disc. “Region Code Error” It indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly. “USB Error” This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. “No music files found.” This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the USB memory. “iPod Error.” This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection. “No music files found.” This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod. “No video files found.” This indicates that no video files are included in the iPod. “Please check the iPod firmware version.” This indicates that the software version is not compatible. Perform the iPod firmware updates and try again. “iPod authorization failed.” This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod. Please check your iPod. Bluetooth® Audio “Music tracks not supported. Please check your portable player.” This indicates a problem in the Bluetooth® device. INFORMATION ●If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer. 215 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM “DISC Error” USB iPod Explanation 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES 1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES* QUICK REFERENCE The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy video such as Blu-ray Disc (BD) and DVD disc separately from the front audio/visual system. The system can be used when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. FUNCTION INDEX Operation Page Using the remote controller 219 Turning on/off the rear entertainment system 220 Turning on/off the display (with rear console display) 221 Opening/Closing the display (with overhead display) 221 Inserting media or connecting a device to the rear player 222 Selecting the sound mode 224 Selecting the source 225 Operating rear seat entertainment system from the front seats 227 Rear seat entertainment system operation 228 Rear seat entertainment system settings 272 Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 275 *: If equipped 216 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES OVERVIEW 5-seat models 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM No. Name Front audio/visual system Display Rear player Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks Remote controller A/V input port (VTR and HDMI port) 217 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES 4-seat models No. Name Front audio/visual system Display Rear player Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks A/V input port (VTR and HDMI port) Remote controller 218 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES 2. SOME BASICS USING THE REMOTE CONTROLLER BASIC OPERATION The rear seat entertainment system can be operated with the remote controller. The system cannot be operated by touching the switches on the screen directly. Before using the remote controller (for new vehicle owners): P.276 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM OPENING THE COVER 1 To use the buttons under the cover, slide the cover down. 219 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES No. Function Press to turn on/off the rear seat entertainment system. Press to turn on/off the display (with rear console display). (P.221) Press to open/close the display (with overhead display). (P.221) TURNING ON/OFF THE REAR ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 1 Press the , “DISC”, “INPUT”, “SOURCE” or “OPEN/CLOSE” (with overhead display) button. Press to change the external source between the following modes:  “DISC” (Font player)  “Rear-DISC” (Rear player) Press to input the selected control icon. Press to display the setting screen. (P.272) Press to adjust the volume. This function is only available when sound is being output from the speakers. (P.224) Press to display the audio/visual source selection screen. (P.225) Press to select a control icon. Press to change the external source between the following modes:  “Rear-External”  “Rear-HDMI”  To turn off the system, press the ton again. but- INFORMATION ● Turning on/off operations can be per- formed from the front seat. (P.227) 220 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES TURNING ON/OFF THE DISPLAY (WITH REAR CONSOLE DISPLAY) 1 Press the OPENING/CLOSING THE DISPLAY (WITH OVERHEAD DISPLAY) 1 Press the “OPEN/CLOSE” button. button. 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  To turn off the display, press the ton again. but-  To close the display, press the “OPEN/ CLOSE” button again. INFORMATION INFORMATION ● When you press the sound will not be turned off. ● When you press the “OPEN/CLOSE” button, the button, the sound will not be turned off. ● The display can be tilted. (P.274) ● Opening and closing operation can be set to auto. (P.274) ● The display will stop closing and return to its previous position if something gets in the way of it closing. 221 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES INSERTING MEDIA OR CONNECTING A DEVICE TO THE REAR PLAYER ■ EJECTING A DISC 1 Press the button and remove the disc. DISC SLOT ■ LOADING A DISC 1 Insert the disc into the slot with the label side up. NOTICE ● If a disc cannot be ejected, do not forcibly take out the disc. Keep pressing the button for approximately 10 seconds and release it.  The “DISC” indicator light turns on when the disc is loaded.  The player will start to play the disc automatically. 222 LS460_600h_Navi_U INFORMATION ● If the ejected disc remains in the slot for 15 seconds, the player will automatically reload the disc. 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES SD CARD SLOT ■ INSERTING AN SD CARD 1 Insert the SD card with the label side up, positioning the cut off corner to the right. A/V INPUT PORT 1 Open the cover and connect audio/vi- sual equipment to the A/V input port. 5-seat models 2 After inserting the SD card, push it straight in until you hear a click. 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 4-seat models ■ EJECTING AN SD CARD 1 Push on the center of the SD card. 2 When it is ejected slightly, pull it straight out. 223 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES SELECTING THE SOUND MODE HEADPHONE MODE SPEAKER MODE Sound from the rear seat entertainment system can be output through the speakers. To listen to the rear seat entertainment system, use headphones. 1 Display the audio control screen. 5-seat models 2 Select (P.225) .  The speaker volume is adjusted using the remote controller. (P.219) 4-seat models Headphones jack  Connect a pair of headphones to the jack. Volume knob  Push and then turn clockwise/counterclockwise to increase/decrease the volume. 224 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES SELECTING THE SOURCE The front and rear audio/visual source can be controlled from the rear seat entertainment system. 1 Press the “SOURCE” button. 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 2 Select the desired source. INFORMATION ● The page indicators above the source icons can be selected to change the source icon page. ● If the cursor is on the rightmost source icon, pressing the  will change the source icon page. 225 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES Available front audio/ visual source Available rear audio/ visual source Page AM/FM/SAT “AM”, “FM”, “SAT”  228 Internet radio “Apps”   Audio CD MP3/WMA/AAC disc “DISC” Audio/visual source Video CD DVD Blu-ray Disc  229 “Rear-DISC” 232 “DISC” 235  242 USB audio “USB”  250 iPod audio/video “iPod”  253 Bluetooth® audio “Bluetooth*”  256  “Rear-SD” 259 “AUX”, “External” “Rear-External”, “Rear-HDMI” 271 SD audio/video/picture AUX, External, HDMI *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. INFORMATION ● If the selected source is currently being received or played on the front audio/visual system, the same content will be output by the rear seat entertainment system. 226 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FROM THE FRONT SEATS 1 Display the audio control screen. (P.143) 2 Select “Source”. 3 Select “Rear”. 4 Select the desired button. AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM No. 4 Function Select to turn the rear seat entertainment system on/off. Select to lock the system so passengers in the rear seats cannot operate the rear seat entertainment system. Select to play the rear seat entertainment system over the speakers in the vehicle. 227 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 1. AM/FM/SAT RADIO OVERVIEW The radio operation screen can be reached by the following method: Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “AM”, “FM” or “SAT” (The XM Satellite radio). ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER No. Function AM/FM Radio: Press to adjust the frequency. SAT Radio: Press to select a channel. Press and hold until you hear a beep to seek for receivable stations/channels. Cache radio only: Press to play/pause. Cache radio only: Press to skip forward/rewind 2 minutes. Cache radio only: Press and hold to fast forward/rewind continuously. Press to select a preset station/channel. Press and hold until you hear a beep to seek for receivable stations/channels. AM/FM Radio: Press to select a preset station/channel. SAT Radio: Press to select a program type/channel category. INFORMATION ● To return to the live radio broadcast, select “Live”. 228 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 2. CD OVERVIEW Audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs can be played on this system. The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “DISC” or “Rear-DISC”. Inserting a disc The front player: P.144 The rear player: P.222 Selecting a disc to play (disc in the front player or rear player) Press the “DISC” button. 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ■ CONTROL SCREEN Audio CD MP3/WMA/AAC disc 229 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER No. Function Select to set repeat playback. (P.231) Select to set random playback. (P.231) Press to select a track/file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to play/pause. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Press to select a folder. Press and hold the “ ” button to select the top file stored in the top folder in the disc. 230 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION REPEATING RANDOM ORDER The track/file or folder currently being listened to can be repeated. Tracks/files or folders can be automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select 1 Select . .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows:  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: Audio CD Audio CD MP3/WMA/AAC disc MP3/WMA/AAC disc • track repeat  off AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM • file repeat  folder repeat  off*1 • file repeat  off*2 1 * : When random playback is off *2: When random playback is on 4 • random (1 disc random)  off • random (1 folder random)  folder random (1 disc random)  off 231 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 3. VIDEO CD OVERVIEW The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “Rear-DISC”. Inserting a disc (P.222) ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER No. Function  Press to select a track.  Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to play/pause.  During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward. Press to stop. Press to display the option screen. (P.233) Press and hold to fast rewind. 232 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION VIDEO CD OPTIONS 1 Press the “OPTION” button. 2 Check that the following screen is displayed. No. Function Select to turn off the option screen. Select to display the next or previous page.  During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward. 4 Select to play/pause. Select and hold to rewind. Select to change the audio channel. (P.234) Select to change the page. Select to return to a predetermined scene. Select to select the desired content using numbers. (P.234) 233 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM Select to stop. 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGING THE AUDIO CHANNEL The audio channel can be changed for discs with multiple audio channels. 1 Select “MAIN/SUB”. 2 Each time “MAIN/SUB” is selected, the mode changes in the following order: “Main”: Main audio channel “Sub”: Sub audio channel “Main/Sub”: Both the main and sub audio channels SELECT THE DESIRED CONTENT USING NUMBERS 1 Select “Select Number”. 2 Enter the title number and select “OK”.  The player starts playing video for that title number. 234 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 4. DVD (DVD VIDEO AND AVCHD DISC) OVERVIEW The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “DISC” or “Rear-DISC”. Inserting a disc The front player: P.144 The rear player: P.222 Selecting a disc to play (disc in the front player or rear player) Press the “DISC” button. 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 235 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER No. Function Press to select a chapter. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to play/pause.  During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward. Press to stop. DVD video only: Press to display the menu screen. Press to display the option screen. (P.237, 241) Press to display the top menu screen. Press and hold to fast rewind. 236 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION DVD VIDEO OPTIONS 1 Press the “OPTION” button. 2 Check that the following screen is displayed. No. Function Page Select to display the initial setup screen. 238 Select to turn off the option screen.  Select to display the next or previous page.   During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward.  Select to play/pause.  Select to stop.  Select and hold to rewind.  Select to display the menu screen.  Select to display the top menu screen.  Select to change the angle. 240 Select to change the subtitle language. 240 Select to change the audio language. 240 Select to return to a predetermined scene.  Select to search for a title. 240 4 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 237 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION INITIAL SETUP 1 Select “Setup”. 2 Select the items to be set. When “DISC” is selected When “Rear-DISC” is selected No. Function Page Select to change the initial audio language. 239 Select to change the initial subtitle language. 239 Select to change the initial language of the disc menu. 239 Select to set the angle mark on/off.  Select to set the parental lock. 239 Select to set a dynamic range. 239 Select to initialize all menus.  Select to display the second page.  BD history data such as bookmarks and resume point can be deleted.  Select to set the restriction age. 239 Select to set a quick playback. (BD-Video) After inserting a BD disc you can skip over to the first playback point and can immediately playback the main story.  Select to set the BD-Video secondary audio.  3 Select “OK”. 238 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION ■ AUDIO LANGUAGE ■ DYNAMIC RANGE 1 Select “Audio Language”. 2 Select the desired language to be The difference between the lowest and highest sound volumes can be adjusted. heard.  If the desired language to be heard cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. (P.290) ■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE  If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. (P.290) ■ MENU LANGUAGE 1 Select “Menu Language”. 2 Select the desired language to be read.  If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. (P.290) ■ PARENTAL LOCK 1 Select “Parental Lock”. 2 Enter the 4-digit personal code. 3 Select a parental level (1-8). ed, the setting changes in the following order: “MAX”: Maximum dynamic range 4 “STD”: Standard dynamic range “MIN”: Minimum dynamic range “AUTO”: Automatic adjust (Dolby TrueHD only) AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 1 Select “Subtitle Language”. 2 Select the desired language to be read. 1 Select “Dynamic Range”. 2 Each time “Dynamic Range” is select- INFORMATION ● “AUTO” is available for BD-Video only. ● “MIN” is not available for BD-Video. ■ BD PARENTAL LOCK 1 Select “BD Parental Lock”. 2 Enter the 4-digit personal code. 3 Enter the age on the “Enter restriction age” screen. 239 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGING THE ANGLE CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE The angle can be selected for discs that are multi-angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the screen. The audio language can be changed for discs with multiple audio languages. 1 Select “Angle”. 2 Each time “Angle” is selected, the angle 1 Select “Audio”. 2 Each time “Audio” is selected, another is changed.  The angles available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc. CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE The subtitle language can be changed for discs with multiple subtitle languages. 1 Select “Subtitle”. 2 Each time “Subtitle” is selected, another language available on the disc is selected.  The languages available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc.  When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can be hidden. 240 LS460_600h_Navi_U language available on the disc is selected.  The languages available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc. SEARCHING FOR A TITLE OR CHAPTER DVD video 1 Select “Search”. AVCHD video 1 Select “Title Search” or “Chapter Search”. 2 Enter the title number or chapter number, and select “OK”.  The player starts playing video for that title or chapter number. 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION AVCHD VIDEO OPTIONS 1 Press the “OPTION” button. 2 Check that the following screen is displayed. No. Function Page DVD only: Select to display the initial setup screen. 238 Select to turn off the option screen.  Select to display the next or previous page.   During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward.  Select to play/pause.  Select to stop.  Select and hold to rewind.  Select to display the top menu screen.  Select to change the subtitle language. 240 Select to change the audio language. 240 Select to return to a predetermined scene.  Select to search for a chapter. 240 Select to search for a title. 240 4 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 241 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 5. Blu-ray Disc (BD-Video AND BDAV) OVERVIEW This system can play Blu-ray Disc (BD) videos with digital sound. In addition to commercial BD titles, BDAV videos can be played on this system, therefore digital TV recorded by home digital video recorders can also be played on this system. The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “SOURCE” button and select “Rear-DISC”. Inserting a disc (P.222) ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER When the cover is closed When the cover is opened 242 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION No. Function Press to select a chapter. BD-Video only: Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. BDAV only: Press and hold to select a program/playlist. Press to play/pause.  During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward. 4 Press to stop. AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM BD-Video only: Press to display the pop-up menu screen. Press to display the option screen. (P.244, 248) BD-Video only: Press to display the top menu screen. Press and hold to fast rewind. BD-Video only: Color buttons BD-Video only: 10 key buttons INFORMATION ● Some BD-Video discs have a local storage feature which allows the disc’s additional infor- mation, such as resume information, to be stored. This additional information can be utilized when BD-Video is being played. Refer to the manual that came with the BD-Video disc to see whether it has a local storage feature. If it does, the local storage feature can be enabled by inserting an SD card into this system. ● If an SD card with existing data, is inserted, BD-Video disc information will not be stored on the SD card in order to protect the data on the SD card. To enable the local storage feature, use an SD card that does not have any data on it. 243 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION BD-VIDEO OPTIONS 1 Press the “OPTION” button. 2 Check that the following screen is displayed. 244 LS460_600h_Navi_U No. Function Page Select to display the initial setup screen. 238 Select to turn off the option screen.  Select to display the next or previous page.   During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward.  Select to play/pause.  Select to stop.  Select and hold to rewind.  Select to display the popup menu. 245 Select to display the top menu screen.  Select to change the angle. 245 Select to change the subtitle language. 246 Select to change the audio language. 246 Select to return to a predetermined scene.  Select to search for a chapter. 246 Select to search for a title. 246 Select to change the secondary audio. 246 Select to display the secondary video (Picture-inpicture). 247 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION No. Function Page Select to display the 10 key pad. 247 Select to display the color key buttons. 247 DISPLAYING THE POP-UP MENU Some BD-Video discs have a pop-up navigation menu that can be called up and be operated on the screen without interrupting playback. 1 Select “Pop-up Menu”. 2 Select the menu item using the , ,  or  on the “ENT” button, and press CHANGING THE ANGLE The angle can be changed for discs that are multi-angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the screen. 1 Select “Angle”. 2 Each time “Angle” is selected, the angle changes.  The angles available are restricted to those available on the BD disc. 245 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM the “ENT” button. 4 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE The subtitle language can be changed for discs with multiple subtitle languages. 1 Select “Subtitle”. 2 Each time “Subtitle” is selected, anoth- er language available on the disc is selected. “Hide”: Subtitle can be hidden “Style”: Subtitle style can be changed. CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE The audio language can be changed for discs with multiple audio languages. 1 Select “Audio”. 2 Each time “Audio” is selected, another language available on the disc is selected. 246 LS460_600h_Navi_U SEARCHING FOR A TITLE OR CHAPTER 1 Select “Title Search” or “Chapter Search”. 2 Input the title number or chapter number, and select “OK”.  The player starts playing video for that title or chapter number. CHANGING THE SECONDARY AUDIO The secondary audio that for the secondary video can be changed. 1 Select “PinP Audio”. 2 Each time “PinP Audio” is selected, an- other secondary audio stored on the disc is selected. “OFF”: Select to turn the secondary audio off 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION DISPLAYING THE SECONDARY VIDEO (PICTURE-IN-PICTURE) Picture-in-picture is a secondary video that plays embedded in the primary video. The secondary video can be played from a disc compatible with the picturein-picture function. The color button is used for various uses according to directions of contents. 1 Select “Color Keys”. 2 Select the color button. You can also press the color buttons (AD). 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 1 Select “PinP”. 2 The secondary video is displayed on the DISPLAYING THE COLOR KEY BUTTONS screen. Each time “PinP” is selected, another secondary video available on the disc is selected. “Hide”: Secondary video can be hidden. DISPLAYING THE 10 KEY PAD The 10 key pad is used when inputting numbers according to directions of contents. 1 Select “Key Pad”. 2 Select the number button. You can also press the 10 key buttons (10). 247 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION BDAV OPTIONS 1 Press the “OPTION” button. 2 Check that the following screen is displayed. No. Function Page Select to display the initial setup screen. 238 Select to turn off the option screen.  Select to display the next or previous page.   During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward.  Select to play/pause.  Select to stop.  Select and hold to rewind.  Select to change the audio channel. 249 Select to change the angle. 245 Select to change the audio language. 246 Select to change the playback mode. 249 Select to search for a chapter. 246 Select to search for a title. 246 INFORMATION ● Depending on the disc, some buttons may not be displayed on the screen. 248 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION CHANGING THE AUDIO CHANNEL The audio channel can be changed for discs with multiple audio channels. 1 Select “MAIN/SUB”. 2 Each time “MAIN/SUB” is selected, the The playback mode can be changed to program mode or playlist mode. Playlist mode cannot be selected if a playlist is not stored on the disc. 1 Select “Playback Mode”. 2 Each time “Playback Mode” is select- ed, the mode changes. “Program”: Playback the disc in order of program number “Playlist”: Playback the disc in order of playlist number 249 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM mode changes in the following order: “Main”: Main audio channel “Sub”: Sub audio channel “Main/Sub”: Both the main and sub audio channels CHANGING THE PLAYBACK MODE 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 6. USB MEMORY OVERVIEW USB audio can be played on this system. The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “USB”. Connecting a USB memory (P.145) ■ CONTROL SCREEN 250 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM No. Function Select to set repeat playback. (P.252) Select to set random playback. (P.252) Press to select a file/track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to play/pause. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to select a folder/album. 251 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION REPEATING The file/track or folder/album currently being listened to can be repeated. 1 Select .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: When random playback is off • file/track repeat  folder/album repeat  off When random playback is on • file/track repeat  off RANDOM ORDER Files/tracks or folders/albums can be automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • random (1 folder/album random)  folder/album random (all folder/album random)  off 252 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 7. iPod OVERVIEW iPod audio and iPod video can be played on this system. For viewing videos from an iPod, it is necessary to set the front audio/visual system’s “Video Sound Input” to “A/V”. (P.200) The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “iPod”. Connecting an iPod (P.145) 4 ■ CONTROL SCREEN AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 253 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER No. Function Select to set repeat playback. (P.255) Select to set random playback. (P.255) Select to display the video screen. To return to the audio screen, press the “SOURCE” button and select “Music”. Press to select a track/file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to play/pause. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. 254 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION iPod AUDIO REPEATING The track currently being listened to can be repeated. 1 Select . Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • track shuffle  album shuffle  off 255 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • track repeat  off RANDOM ORDER 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 8. Bluetooth® AUDIO OVERVIEW The Bluetooth® audio operation screen can be reached by the following method: Press the “SOURCE” button and select “Bluetooth*”. Connecting a Bluetooth® audio device (P.188) ■ CONTROL SCREEN *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 256 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM No. Function Select to set repeat playback. (P.258) Select to set random playback. (P.258) Press to select a track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to play/pause. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. 257 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION Bluetooth AUDIO REPEATING The track or album currently being listened to can be repeated. 1 Select .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • track repeat  album repeat  off 258 LS460_600h_Navi_U RANDOM ORDER Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • album random  all track random  off 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 9. SD CARD This system can play still pictures, music and movies (SD video, AVCHD video, etc.) that are stored on an SD card. The SD operation screen can be reached by the following method: Press the “SOURCE” button and select “Rear-SD”. Inserting an SD card (P.223) 3 Select the desired mode. No. SELECTING THE SD MODE “Rear-SD”. 2 Select “SD Menu”. Page Select to format the SD card. If the SD card is formatted, all data on the card will be erased.  Select to delete stored BDVideo data from the SD card.  Select to play music. 260 Select to play still pictures. 263 Select to play SD video. 266 Select to play AVCHD Video. 269 Select to play a movie. 266 259 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 1 Press the “SOURCE” button and select Function 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION MUSIC OVERVIEW MP3/WMA/AAC files stored on an SD card can be played. The SD music operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P.259 ■ CONTROL SCREEN 260 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM No. Function Select to set repeat playback. ( P.262) Select to set random playback. (P.262) Select to display the SD menu screen. ( P.259) Press to select a file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to play/pause. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to select a folder. Press and hold “ ”, the top file stored in the top folder in the SD card will be selected. 261 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION SD MUSIC ■ RANDOM ORDER ■ REPEATING Files or folders can be automatically and randomly selected. The file or folder currently being listened to can be repeated. 1 Select 1 Select .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: When random playback is off • file repeat  folder repeat  off When random playback is on • file repeat  off 262 LS460_600h_Navi_U .  Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • random (1 folder random)  folder random (1 disc random)  off 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION PICTURE OVERVIEW Image files stored on an SD card can be displayed individually or in a slideshow. The SD picture operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P.259 ■ CONTROL SCREEN 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 263 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER No. Function Select to display the next/previous page. Select to display the desired still picture.  When the picture thumbnail list is displayed: Press to display the selected picture in full screen.  When a full screen picture is displayed: Press to display the picture thumbnail list. When a full screen picture is displayed, press to display the option screen. (P.265) When a full screen picture is displayed, press to change the displayed picture. 264 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION OPTION SCREEN 1 Press the “OPTION” button. 2 Check that the following screen is dis- ■ PICTURE SETTINGS SCREEN 1 Select “Setup”. 2 Select the items to be set. played. 4 No. Function Select to turn off the option screen. Select to start the slide show settings. (P.265) Select to display the picture list screen. Select to start a slideshow. To end the slideshow, press the “OPTION” or “ENT” button. Select to display the current still picture information. Function Select to set slideshow interval time. “5s”  “10s”  “15s”  “30s”  “60s” Select to set slideshow effect. “Fade”  “Slide”  “Wipe1”  “Wipe2”  “Dissolve”  “Zoom”  “OFF” Select to set repeat of the slideshow on/off. Select to restore the default settings. 3 Select “OK”. Select to rotate the still picture. Select to zoom on the still picture. 265 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM No. 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION VIDEO/MOVIE OVERVIEW SD videos/movies stored on an SD card can be played. The SD video/movie operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P.259 ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER No. Function Press to select a file/chapter. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to play/pause.  During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward. Press to stop. Press to display the option screen. (P.267) Press and hold to fast rewind. 266 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION VIDEO/MOVIE OPTIONS No. Function Page Select to turn off the option screen.  Select to display the next or previous page.   During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward.  Select to play/pause.  Select to stop.  Select and hold to rewind.  Select to display the file information.  * Select to change the audio channel. 268 * Select to change the playback mode. 268 * Select to search for a chapter. 268 * Select to search for a title. 268 1 Press the “OPTION” button. 2 Check that the following screen is displayed. * 4 INFORMATION ● Depending on the data stored on the SD card, some buttons may not be displayed on the screen. 267 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM *: SD Video only 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION ■ CHANGING THE AUDIO CHANNEL The audio channel can be changed for videos with multiple audio channels. 1 Select “Multiplexed Audio”. 2 Each time “Audio” is selected, the mode changes in the following order: “Main”: Main audio channel “Sub”: Sub audio channel “Main/Sub”: Both the main and sub audio channels ■ CHANGING MODE THE PLAYBACK The playback mode can be changed to program mode or playlist mode. Playlist mode cannot be selected if a playlist is not stored on the disc. 1 Select “Playback Mode”. 2 Each time “Playback Mode” is select- ed, the mode changes. “Program”: Playback the disc in order of program number “Playlist”: Playback the disc in order of playlist number 268 LS460_600h_Navi_U ■ SEARCHING FOR A TITLE OR CHAPTER 1 Select “Title Search” or “Chapter Search”. 2 Enter the title or chapter number and select “OK”.  The player starts playing video for that title or chapter number. 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION VIDEO (SD AVCHD) OVERVIEW SD Videos (AVCHD videos) stored on an SD card can be played. The SD video (AVCHD) operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P.259 ■ REMOTE CONTROLLER 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 269 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION No. Function Press to select a chapter. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind. Press to play/pause.  During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward. Press to stop. Press to display the option screen. (P.241) Press to display the top menu screen. Press and hold to fast rewind. 270 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION 10. EXTERNAL DEVICES OVERVIEW 271 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audio/visual equipment is connected to the A/V input port. The external devices operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “AUX”, “External”, “Rear-External” or “Rear-HDMI”. Connecting a external device The front player: P.145 The rear player: P.223 Selecting a input port to use (VTR input port or HDMI input port) Press the “INPUT” button. 9. SETUP FOR REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SETTINGS ADJUSTING THE SCREEN DISPLAYING THE SETTING SCREEN The screen image quality, such as the brightness and contrast levels, can be adjusted. Adjustable items depend on the selected input source. 1 Press the “SETTING” button. 1 Display the settings screen. (P.272) 2 Select the “Display” tab. 2 Select the tab to be set. No. * Function Page Select to adjust the screen. 272 Select to change the screen size. 274 Select to tilt the display. 274 *: With overhead display 272 LS460_600h_Navi_U 9. SETUP FOR REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 3 Select the item to be set. No. Function Select to switch between NTSC/ PAL input format. (PAL: indicator on, NTSC: indicator off) No. Function 4 Select to darken the screen. “Brightness” “+” Select to brighten the screen. “Contrast” “-” Select to weaken the contrast. “Contrast” “+” Select strengthen contrast. to the “Color” “R” Select strengthen red color. to the “Color” “G” Select to strengthen the green color. “Tone” “-” Select to weaken the tone. “Tone” “+” Select to Strengthen the tone. AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM “Brightness” “-” Select to turn on/off the “LCD AI”. The “LCD AI” automatically determines the tone of the video image and sets the contrast to an optimum level, displaying a sharp image. Select to turn the display off (with rear console display). To turn it on, press the “DISC”, “SETTING”, “SOURCE” or “INPUT” button. 273 LS460_600h_Navi_U 9. SETUP FOR REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM CHANGING THE SCREEN SIZE The screen size can be changed for each input mode individually. Depending on the audio source, some functions may not be available. TILTING THE DISPLAY (WITH OVERHEAD DISPLAY) 1 Display the settings screen. (P.272) 2 Select the “Tilt” tab. 3 Select the item to be set. 1 Display the settings screen. (P.272) 2 Select the “Screen Size” tab. 3 Select the desired screen size. No. No. Function Select to display the screen at the original ratio. Select to widen the 4:3 aspect screen horizontally to fill the screen. 274 LS460_600h_Navi_U Function Select to adjust the display angle. The display angle is memorized and will be recalled when the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Select to turn automatic closing of the display on/off. If “Auto Close” is on, the display will automatically close when the engine switch is turned off. The display will automatically open when the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode again. 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 1. OPERATING INFORMATION CAUTION ● When the rear seat entertainment system ● Cleaning the display: Wipe the display with a dry soft cloth. If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the surface of the screen may be scratched. ● To prevent damage to the remote controller: • Keep the remote controller away from direct sunlight, heat and high humidity. • Do not drop or strike the remote controller against hard objects. • Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote controller. ● BD/DVD/CD player: Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the BD/DVD/ CD player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the slot. ● Closing the display (with overhead display): Do not close the display using your hand. Doing so may result in a malfunction. ● For normal operation after replacing the battery: Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. • Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. • Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote controller. • Do not bend either of the battery terminals. 275 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM is not used (with overhead display): Keep the display closed. In the event of an accident or sudden braking, the opened display may hit an occupant’s body, resulting in injury. ● To prevent accidents and electric shock: Do not disassemble or modify the remote controller. ● When the remote controller is not used: Stow the remote controller. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking. ● Closing the display (with overhead display): Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. ● Removed battery and other parts: These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury. NOTICE 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM CAUTION SCREEN A caution screen appears for a few seconds when the rear display turns on. During this time, only the “OPEN/CLOSE” button can be operated (with overhead display). ■ WHEN THE REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERIES ARE FULLY DEPLETED 1 Remove the cover. WHEN APPEARS ON THE SCREEN indicates that the selected icon cannot be used at this time. THE REMOTE CONTROLLER 2 Remove the depleted batteries and install new batteries. ■ BEFORE USING THE REMOTE CONTROLLER (FOR NEW VEHICLE OWNERS) 1 Remove the insulating sheet before using the remote controller. ■ IF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERIES ARE DISCHARGED The following symptoms may occur. INFORMATION ● An insulating sheet is set to prevent the batteries from being depleted. 276 LS460_600h_Navi_U  The remote controller will not function properly.  The operational range is reduced. ■ USE TWO AA BATTERIES  Batteries can be purchased at Lexus dealer, electric appliance shop, or camera stores.  Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by Lexus dealer.  Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM HEADPHONES Infrared wireless headphones can also be used. However, with some headphones generally available in the market, it may be difficult to catch signals properly. Lexus recommends the use of Lexus genuine wireless headphones. Contact your Lexus dealer. 4 VOLUME AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  Adjust the volume when you connect the headphone to the jack. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body.  Conversational speech on some BD/ DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the BD/DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this in mind. 277 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM COPYRIGHTS AND TRADEMARKS  Blu-ray Disc, Blu-ray, BD-Live, BDXL, and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.  Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.  “AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.  “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.  SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 278 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM  For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential is a trademark of DTS, Inc.  DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 4  This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 patent portfolio license, AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal use of a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard, AVC Standard and VC-1 Standard (“MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or (ii) decode MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C. See http:// www.mpegla.com. 279 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries. 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM  Cinavia Notice This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be displayed and playback or copying will be interrupted. More information about Cinavia technology is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.  This product incorporates proprietary technology under license from Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending as well as copyright and trade secret protection for certain aspects of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright 20042014 Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  WMA (Windows Media Audio), Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.  This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited. 280 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 281 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM  This product incorporates the following software: (1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation, (2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Corporation, (3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2 (GPL V2), (4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version 2.1 (LGPL v2.1) and/or, (5) open sourced software other than the software licensed under the GPL v2 and/or LGPL v2.1 For the software categorized as (3) and (4), please refer to the terms and conditions of GPL v2 and LGPL v2.1, as the case may be at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html and http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. In addition, the software categorized as (3) and (4) are copyrighted by several individuals. Please refer to the copyright notice of those individuals at http://car.panasonic.jp/oss/44bu9ph2/ The GPL/LGPL software is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. At least three (3) years from delivery of products, we will give to any third party who contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code covered under GPL v2/LGPL v2.1. [Contact address] Engineering Administration Group Manager Panasonic Corporation 4261 Ikonobe-cho, Tsuzuki-ku, Yokohama City 224-8520, Japan Source code is also freely available to you and any other member of the public via our website bellow. http://car.panasonic.jp/oss/44bu9ph2/ For the software categorized as (5) includes as follows. 1. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) 2. This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. 3. Free Type code. 4. The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software. 5. Vera Fonts. (http://www.gnome.org/fonts/) 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc PLAYER AND DISCS CAUTION: Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration. THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL. DISCS THAT CAN BE USED CAUTION ● BD/DVD video precaution: Conversa- tional speech on some BDs/DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the BD/DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or startled when you change to a different audio source. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume. 282 LS460_600h_Navi_U The following discs cannot be used on this system: • BDXL disc • BD-RE with the cartridge • HD DVD • DVD-Audio • SACD 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM NOTICE ● Player precautions: Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself. • Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot. • Do not apply oil to the player. • Store discs away from direct sunlight. • Never try to disassemble any part of the player. NOTICE • Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area 4 ● Discs and adapters that cannot be used: Do not use the following types of discs. Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters, Dual Discs or printable discs. Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function. • Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in (12 cm) • Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off • Low-quality or deformed discs 283 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM NOTICE 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ABOUT MP3/WMA/AAC FILES AND COMPATIBILITY MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3), WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) is a standard audio compression format. There is a limit to the MP3, WMA and AAC file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used. ■ MP3 FILE COMPATIBILITY Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3) Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz) Compatible bit rates MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps) (compatible with VBR) Compatible channel modes stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mono ID3 tags ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) ■ WMA FILE COMPATIBILITY Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) Compatible sampling frequencies 8, 11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) Compatible bit rates Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2): CBR 5-320 (kbps) (only compatible with 2-channel playback) 284 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ■ AAC FILE COMPATIBILITY Compatible standards MPEG2/AAC-LC, MPEG4/AAC-LC (ADIF is not supported) Compatible sampling frequencies ADTS (MPEG2 AAC): 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MP4 (MPEG4 AAC): 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) Compatible bit rates ADTS (MPEG2 AAC): 8-384 (kbps) MP4 (MPEG4 AAC): 8-384 (kbps) Compatible channel mode ADTS (MPEG2 AAC): 1/0, 2/0, 3/0, 2/1, 2/2, 3/1, 3/2.1 MP4 (MPEG4 AAC): 1/0, 2/0, 3/0, 2/1, 2/2, 3/1, 3/2.1 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ■ COMPATIBLE MEDIA AND DISC FORMATS Compatible media CD-ROM/R/RW DVD-ROM/R/RW Disc formats CD-ROM Mode 1, CD-ROM XA Mode 2 Form 1 File formats ISO9660 Level 1, 2 (Romeo, Joliet, RockRidge), UDF (1.02, 1.50, 2.00, 2.01) Maximum directory hierarchy 8 levels Maximum length of folder names/file names The number of the maximum indication letters by design specifications of the indication machine side (support proportional font, and there are distinction of the half size and full size) Maximum number of folders 255 (including the root) Maximum number of files per disc 512 285 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ■ FILE NAMES The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a. ■ MULTI-SESSIONS As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. ■ MP3, WMA AND AAC PLAYBACK  When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or AAC file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write inany files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format data, only music data can be played.  To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.  Playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.  There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA or AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.  When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all. ■ EXTENSIONS If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers. 286 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM DYNAMIC RANGE “Dynamic Range” can be set only when Dolby Digital or Dolby TrueHD is selected. When Dolby TrueHD is selected, the dynamic range is the same as “MAX” even when set to “MIN”. (P.239) BD-Video SECONDARY AUDIO  There is no interactive audio  There is no secondary audio  There are no BD-J titles If BD-Video secondary audio is set to off, HD sound can be output. However, for sections that have secondary audio recorded, secondary audio will not be output. BD/DVD VIDEO DISCS ■ COMPATIBLE MEDIA Media that can be used for playback are BD-ROMs, BD-Rs, BD-REs, DVD-ROMs, DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs. ● When storing content on BD-R, BD-RE, DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, they must be finalized using a recorder. Discs that are not finalized cannot be played by this system. ● Discs that are recorded with multi session cannot be played by this system. ● BD-Live is not supported. ■ THE COLOR TV FORMATS This player conforms to NTSC/PAL color TV formats. ■ REGION CODES Some BD/DVD video discs have a region code indicating the region in which you can use the BD/DVD video disc. If the BD-Video disc is not labeled “A” or “ABC” or if the DVD video disc is not labeled “1” or “ALL”, you cannot use it on this player. Depending on the disc production company, some Blu-ray Disc may be designed to not be able to be played in some countries and regions. If you attempt to play BD/DVD video discs with incompatible region codes on this player, an error message appears on the screen. Even if the BD/DVD video disc does not have a region code, in some cases it cannot be used. ■ COMPATIBLE DISC FORMATS Disc formats that can be used for playback are BD-Video formats, BDAV formats, AVCHD formats, and DVD video formats. 287 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM If BD-Video secondary audio is set to on, secondary audio is output during sections that have secondary audio recorded. During these sections, HD sound, such as 7.1 ch audio, will not be output. However, if you are playing sections that meet all of the following conditions, HD sound can be output: INFORMATION 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ■ MARKS SHOWN ON BD/DVD VIDEO DISCS Mark Meaning PAL/NTSC Indicates compatibility with PAL/NTSC format color TVs Indicates the number of audio tracks Indicates the number of language subtitles Indicates the number of angles Indicates the screen display ratios available Wide screen: 16:9 Standard: 4:3 Indicates the disc’s region code  BD-Video “ABC”: all regions Alphabet: region code  DVD video “ALL”: all regions Number: region code 288 LS460_600h_Navi_U BD/DVD VIDEO DISC INFORMATION ■ PARENTAL CONTROLS This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the BD/DVD video disc. Some BD/DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes. DVD VIDEO Level 1 DVD video discs for children can be played. Level 2 - 7 DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played. Level 8 All types of DVD video discs can be played. BD-VIDEO Parental controls of BD-Videos can be set up by inputting an age. If the target age of BD-Video exceeds the age restriction that was set up, then playback will not be possible. ■ MULTI-ANGLE FEATURE You can enjoy the same scene from different angles. ■ MULTI-LANGUAGE OPTION You can select the subtitle and audio languages. 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ■ REGION CODES The region codes are provided on BD/ DVD players and BD/DVD discs. If the BD/ DVD disc does not have the same region code as the BD/DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the player. ■ AVCHD AVCHD is a new format (standard) for high definition video cameras that can record and play high-resolution HD images. DVDs and SD cards with videos recorded in AVCHD format can be used on this system. ■ BDAV (Blu-ray Disc AUDIO/VISUAL) BDAV is one of the audio/visual recording formats for Blu-ray Disc, has been made primarily for the purpose of broadcasting the recording. It is used when recording to BD-R and BDRE by Blu-ray Disc recorder. ■ POP-UP MENU Some BD-Video discs have a pop-up navigation menu that can be called up and be operated on the screen without interrupting 4 playback. ■ PICTURE-IN-PICTURE This is a function of BD-Video that plays the primary video and secondary video simultaneously. For instance, the function is capable of playing the original movie as the primary video while playing video commentary from the film director on a small screen as a secondary video. ■ DUBA (DISC UNBOUND BD·J APPLICATION) For BD-Videos that come as a 2 disc set or more, after finishing and ejecting one of the discs, continuation of the video can be seen shortly after replacing the disc with the proper disc. ■ PLAYLIST (BDAV ONLY) A playlist of favorite scenes by Blu-ray Disc recorder can be created and the scenes can playback via playlist. AUDIO This player can play Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG audio format. Other decoded types cannot be played. 289 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ■ TITLE AND CHAPTER Video and audio stored on BD/DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter. Title: The largest portion of the video and audio stored on BD/DVD video discs. Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title. Chapter: A title comprises of one or more chapters. ■ BD-J Some BD-Video discs contain Java applications, and these applications are called BD-J. You can enjoy various interactive features in addition to playing normal video. 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM LANGUAGE CODES LIST Code Language Code Language 0514 English 0515 Esperanto Code Language 1214 Lingala Code Language 1913 Samoan 1001 Japanese 0520 Estonian 1215 Laotian 1914 Shona 0618 French 0521 Basque 1220 Lithuanian 1915 Somali 0405 German 0601 Persian 1222 Latvian, Lettish 1917 Albanian 0920 Italian 0609 Finnish 1307 Malagasy 1918 Serbian 0519 Spanish 0610 Fiji 1309 Maori 1919 Siswati 2608 Chinese 0615 Faroese 1311 Macedonian 1920 Sesotho 1412 Dutch 0625 Frisian 1312 Malayalam 1921 Sundanese 1620 Portuguese 0701 Irish 1314 Mongolian 1923 Swahili 1922 Swedish 0704 Scottish-Gaelic 1315 Moldavian 2001 Tamil 1821 Russian 0712 Galician 1318 Marathi 2005 Telugu 1115 Korean 0714 Guarani 1319 Malay 2007 Tajik 0512 Greek 0721 Gujarati 1320 Maltese 2008 Thai 0101 Afar 0801 Hausa 1325 Burmese 2009 Tigrinya 0102 Abkhazian 0809 Hindi 1401 Nauru 2011 Turkmen 0106 Afrikaans 0818 Croatian 1405 Nepali 2012 Tagalog 0113 Amharic 0821 Hungarian 1415 Norwegian 2014 Setswana 0118 Arabic 0825 Armenian 1503 Occitan 2015 Tongan 0119 Assamese 0901 Interlingua 1513 (Afan) Oromo 2018 Turkish 0125 Aymara 0905 Interlingue 1518 Oriya 2019 Tsonga 0126 Azerbaijani 0911 Inupiak 1601 Punjabi 2020 Tatar 2023 Twi 0201 Bashkir 0914 Indonesian 1612 Polish 0205 Byelorussian 0919 Icelandic 1619 Pashto, Pushto 2111 Ukrainian 0207 Bulgarian 0923 Hebrew 1721 Quechua 2118 Urdu 0208 Bihari 1009 Yiddish 1813 Rhaeto-Romance 2126 Uzbek 0209 Bislama 1023 Javanese 1814 Kirundi 2209 Vietnamese 0214 Bengali, Bangla 1101 Georgian 1815 Romanian 2215 Volapük 0215 Tibetan 1111 Kazakh 1823 Kinyarwanda 2315 Wolof 0218 Breton 1112 Greenlandic 1901 Sanskrit 2408 Xhosa 0301 Catalan 1113 Cambodian 1904 Sindhi 2515 Yoruba 0315 Corsican 1114 Kannada 1907 Sango 2621 Zulu 0319 Czech 1119 Kashmiri 1908 Serbo-Croatian 0325 Welsh 1121 Kurdish 1909 Sinhalese 0401 Danish 1125 Kirghiz 1911 Slovak 0426 Bhutani 1201 Latin 1912 Slovenian 290 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SD CARD NOTICE SD CARDS THAT CAN BE USED  Memory cards are restricted to the following sizes based on SD standards. From 512 MB to 2 GB SDHC From 4 GB to 32 GB SDXC From 48 GB to 256 GB  Mini SD cards and Micro SD cards can be used, but must be used with an adaptor card.  MultiMedia Card (MMC) cannot be used. CAUTION ● SD cards: Keep away from children. These are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. precautions below may result in damage to the SD cards or the SD card slot. • Do not insert anything other than an SD card into the SD card slot. • Do not stick labels or stickers on SD card. There is a possibility that it may become impossible to eject the SD card from inside the slot. • Do not handle an SD card with wet hands. Doing so may cause electric shock or a malfunction. • Do not allow hands or metal objects to contact the interface pins of SD cards. • Do not place SD cards on the instrument panel, on any place with direct sunlight or in areas with a lot of moisture. • Do not use SD cards in any place where static electricity or electric noise adversely affects SD cards. This may cause data corruption or data loss. • Always place the SD card in its storage case when not in use. 291 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM SD ● SD card precaution: Failure to follow the 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SD CARD FUNCTIONS  Local storage • Some BD videos have a feature to memorize disc information, such as a resume point, in a local storage. The rear seat entertainment system uses an SD card as a local storage device. To use this function, insert an SD card into the SD card slot. • The SD card memory function may differ depending on the BD videos played. • When an SD card that contains any kind of data is inserted, BD video disc information will not be stored into the SD card to protect the existing data in the card. To use an SD card as a local storage, use another SD card that does not contain any data. 292 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM COMPATIBILITY ■ COMPATIBLE FILES Music file format MP3/WMA/AAC file types: P.284 Video file format MPEG-4 Video, H.264/AVC Video (.mp4/.m4v), MPEG-2 Video (.mpg), Windows Media Video (.wmv), AVI container (.avi) Photo file format JPEG (Gray scale JPEG and Motion JPEG are not supported.) Pixel size (photo) Between 1 x 1 and 8192 x 8192 pixels 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ■ MPEG-4 Profile Simple Profile, Advanced Simple Profile Video codec MPEG-4 Video Audio codec MPEG-4 AAC-LC (AAC Low Complexity) Resolution (pixel) Maximum 1920 x 1080 Bit rate Maximum 6Mbps Frame rate Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps ■ H.264/AVC Profile Baseline Profile, Main Profile, High Profile Video codec H.264/AVC Video Audio codec MPEG-4 AAC-LC (AAC Low Complexity) Resolution (pixel) Maximum 1920 x 1080 Bit rate Maximum 20Mbps Frame rate Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps 293 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ■ MPEG-2 Profile MP@HL, MP@ML Video codec MPEG-2 PS (Program Stream) Audio codec MPEG-1 Audio Layer 2, Dolby Digital Resolution (pixel) Maximum 1920 x 1080 Bit rate Maximum 12Mbps Frame rate Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps ■ WINDOWS MEDIA VIDEO (WMV) Profile Simple Profile, Main Profile, Advanced Profile Video codec WMV (VC-1) Audio codec WMA (WMA Professional and Lossless are not supported.) Resolution (pixel) Maximum 1920 x 1080 Bit rate Simple and Main Profile: Maximum 15Mbps Advanced Profile: Maximum 20Mbps Frame rate Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps 294 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ■ AVI CONTAINER Profile Refer to other tables in this section for compatible MPEG-4, H.264/AVC and WMV profiles. Video: H.264/AVC Video Audio: MPEG-4 AAC-LC, MP3 To be played back video and audio codec Video: MPEG-4 Video Audio: MPEG-4 AAC-LC, MP3 Video: WMV (VC-1) Audio: MP3 4 Maximum 1920 x 1080 Bit rate Refer to other tables in this section for compatible MPEG-4, H.264/AVC and WMV profiles. Frame rate Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps ■ SD-VIDEO H.264 MOBILE VIDEO PROFILE Profile Baseline Profile Video codec H.264/AVC Video Audio codec MPEG-4 AAC Resolution (pixel) 640 x 480 and 640 x 360 Bit rate Video: Maximum 1.5Mbps, Audio: Maximum 128kbps Frame rate 30 fps INFORMATION ● For information on how to create a video file, refer to the manual that comes with the encoder software to be used. Depending on the encoder software used, some video files may not be played back. 295 LS460_600h_Navi_U AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM Resolution (pixel) 10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SD CARDS  An SD card is not provided with the rear seat entertainment system and needs to be purchased separately.  Compatible formats: This system is compatible with SD memory cards that meet SD card specifications FAT16 formats, SDHC memory cards in FAT32 format, and SDXC memory cards in exFAT format.  Panasonic SD memory card format software version 4.0 or higher is recommended.  Data stored on an SD card may be lost. Before playing back pictures and videos stored on an SD card, make certain to back up the data.  Before an SD card that contains any kind of data is played, slide the lock switch on the SD card to “LOCK” in order to prevent any data from being accidentally deleted or overwritten.  When discarding or transferring ownership of an SD card: When using format or delete functions on this system or a personal computer, file management data changes but the data on the SD card is not completely erased. Destroying the body of the SD card or using commercial computer software that erases data is recommended when discarding or transferring ownership of an SD card to completely erase the data stored on the card. The management of data stored on an SD card is the customer’s responsibility. 296 LS460_600h_Navi_U A/V INPUT PORT OPERATING AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO THE SYSTEM The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other operations must be made on the audio/visual equipment itself. For details about operation of audio/visual equipment, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. NOTICE ● When the A/V input port is not in use: Keep the A/V input port cover closed. Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or a short circuit. INFORMATION ● HDMI compatible format • Compatible video signal: 480p, 576p,VGA • Compatible sound signal: LPCM 2ch 5 1 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 2 1 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 3 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ......... 298 4 USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM .................................................................. 298 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ....................................................... 299 5 2. CASUAL SPEECH 6 RECOGNIZATION............................ 305 3. COMMAND LIST................................... 306 2 MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION 7 8 1. MOBILE ASSISTANT .............................. 311 9 10 297 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM The voice command system enables the audio/visual, hands-free systems, etc. to be operated using voice commands. Refer to the command list for samples of voice commands. (P. 306) MICROPHONE USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM STEERING SWITCH  It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command. INFORMATION Talk switch  Press the talk switch to start the voice command system.  To cancel voice recognition, press and hold the talk switch. Back switch  Press the back switch to return to the previous screen. 298 LS460_600h_Navi_U ●Wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command. ●Voice commands may not be recognized if: • Spoken too quickly. • Spoken at a low or high volume. • The roof or windows are open. • Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken. • The air conditioning speed is set high. • The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone. ●In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not be possible: • The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize. • There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise. ●This system may not operate immediately after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION The voice command system is operated by speaking commands corresponding to each function. Commands can be confirmed on the screen. The voice command system can be operated from either the main menu screen or shortcut menu screen. OPERATION FROM THE MAIN MENU  If the shortcut menu screen is displayed, say “Main menu” or select “Main menu” to display the main menu screen.  Voice guidance for the voice command system can be skipped by pressing the talk switch. 2 Say the desired category name.  All shortcut commands can be recognized on this screens.  To display the shortcut menu screen, say “Shortcut menu” or select “Shortcut menu”. 1 Press the talk switch.  If the main menu screen is displayed, say “Shortcut menu” or select “Shortcut menu” to display the shortcut menu screen.  Voice guidance for the voice command system can be skipped by pressing the talk switch. 2 Say the tab selection command or select the desired tab.  All commands, including those which are not displayed on the screen, can be recognized.  Commands related to each function are displayed on the screen of each function tab. Some commonly used commands are displayed on the shortcut tab screen. Say “More Hints” to display more commonly used commands.  To display the main menu screen, say “Main menu” or select “Main menu”.  Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands and operation methods.  Saying “Help” or selecting “?” prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands and operation methods. 3 Say or select the desired command on the screen. 299 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 1 Press the talk switch. OPERATION FROM THE SHORTCUTS 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 3 Say the desired command.  Registered POIs, registered names in the contacts list etc., can be said in the place of the “<>” next to the commands. (P. 306) For example: Say “Find nearby dining”, “Call John Smith” etc.  If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no selections are available, perform one of the following to return to the previous screen: • Say “Go back”. • Select “Go Back”. • Press the back switch on the steering wheel.  To cancel voice recognition, select or press and hold the talk switch. 300 LS460_600h_Navi_U , INFORMATION ●If the system does not respond or the confirmation screen does not disappear, press the talk switch and try again. ●If a voice command cannot be recognized, follow the voice guidance and say the voice command again. ●If a voice command cannot be recognized 5 times consecutively, voice recognition will be canceled. Press the talk switch to restart the voice command system. ●“Display Voice Confirmations” can be set on/off on the “Voice Settings” screen. (P. 63) ●When “Display Voice Confirmations” is set to on, voice recognition prompts will be displayed for some voice commands when recognized. If the recognized command is correct, say “Yes” or select “Yes”. (Saying “No” or selecting “No” will display the previous screen.) ●When “Display Voice Confirmations” is set to off, voice recognition prompts will only be displayed for important voice commands. ●If “Display Voice Confirmations” is set to on and commands are generally recognized correctly, a confirmation screen may be displayed asking if you would wish to set “Display Voice Confirmations” to off. To set to off, say “Yes” or select “Yes”. ●“Voice Recognition Prompts” can be set to on or off on the “Voice Settings” screen. (P. 63) ●Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing the talk switch and hearing a beep. ●The “Side Display” cannot be operated during voice recognition. 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ■ DISPLAYING THE “Voice Settings” SCREENS 1 Select .  The “Voice Settings” screen will be displayed. (P. 63) INCREASING THE VOICE RECOGNITION PERFORMANCE 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.  The user will be asked to say sample phrases. This will help the voice command system adapt to the user’s accent. 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Say “Launch ”.  LEXUS App Suite application screen is displayed. VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A DESTINATION SEARCH BY ADDRESS (ENGLISH AND FRENCH ONLY)* 5 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Say “Enter an address”. 3 Say “” in succession.  As voice commands spoken in French are only available for addresses in Quebec, Canada, it is not necessary to say “” in French. *: With navigation function 301 LS460_600h_Navi_U VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Voice”. 4 Select “Train Voice Recognition”. VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: LAUNCH LEXUS App Suite APPLICATION* 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION  A confirmation screen will be displayed showing the recognition results. If multiple matching items are found, a selection screen will be displayed. Say “” or select the number.  Some areas cannot be recognized by the voice recognition system.  If voice commands cannot be recognized repeatedly, a confirmation screen may be displayed asking if you would wish to call a “Destination Assist” operator for help. (P. 400) To call an operator, say “Yes” or select “Yes”. (Saying “No” or selecting “No” will display the previous screen.)  For information regarding the state/ province setting to perform a destination search by address: P. 90 4 If the recognized address is correct, say “Yes” or select “Yes”.  To correct the city name, street name, or house number, say “Change city”, “Change street”, or “Change house number”. (Saying “No” or “Go Back”, or selecting “No” or “Go Back” will display the previous screen.) 5 Say “Go directly” or select “Go Directly”.  After this, follow the voice guidance and search for a destination route by voice command operation. 302 LS460_600h_Navi_U INFORMATION ●The voice command recognition is designed to recognize the main body of the official street name. For example: if the official street name is “East Main Street”, the voice command recognition will recognize “Main”. ●Say the desired number, cardinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”. For example: Say “West 555”. ●Inputting the house number can be skipped. ●Even if the state set using voice recognition is different from the set state in the “Address” screen (which was set when a destination was set manually), the set state in the “Address” screen will not change. (P. 91) ●The house number voice recognition conditions are outlined below: • Numerals: 10 digits or less • Numerals and cardinal direction or a hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 digits or less (Do not say “and”.) • Cardinal direction or a hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 digits or less (Do not say “and”.) • Numerals are recognized as single digits only. • The cardinal direction and hyphens are only recognized once. • The following cardinal directions can be recognized: North, East, West and South. 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A SONG 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Say “Play song ”.  A confirmation screen will be displayed showing the recognition results. If multiple matching items are found, a selection screen will be displayed. Say “” or select the number.  The system starts playing music and the song lists are displayed. 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Say “Call ”.  A confirmation screen will be displayed showing the recognition results. If multiple matching items are found, a selection screen will be displayed. Say “” or select the number. INFORMATION ●In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Call ”, after saying “Call a contact” say the name, or the name and type of phone, of a contact. For example: “Call a contact”, “John Smith” or “Call a contact”, “Mary Davis”, “Mobile” ●There are 4 types of phones: Home, Mobile, Office and Other. ●Short or abbreviated names in the contacts list may not be recognized. Change names in the contacts list to full names. ●Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed. After confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”. ●When the system recognizes multiple names from the contacts list, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the top of the screen, say or select the number of the name from the candidate list to select a name from the candidate list. ●When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the contacts list, a candidate list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say or select the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list to select a phone number from the candidate list. 303 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM INFORMATION ●The Gracenote database is only compatible with the USB or iPod mode. ●The list screens can be operated by selecting using the Remote Touch as well as by recognizing the voice commands. ●A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and playback. (P. 176, 180) ●When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so tracks can be searched using voice commands. ●Recognition data is updated under the following conditions: • When the USB memory or iPod data has changed. • When the voice recognition language is changed. (P. 56) ●While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search cannot be performed using a voice command. ●When the “Music” tab is disappeared on the shortcut menu screen, it is not possible to search for a track using a voice command. VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: CALL NAME 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Say the phone number.  In the same manner as it is displayed on the screen, “Dial ”, after saying “Dial a number” say the phone number.  Say the phone number one digit at a time. For example, if the phone number is 2345678: Say “two three four five six seven eight” 3 Say “Call” or press the switch on the steering wheel.  When the confirmation screen appears, say “Yes” or select “Yes” or press the switch on the steering wheel.  When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen. Pressing the switch on the steering wheel makes a call to the top entry on the list. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list to select a phone number from the candidate list. 304 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the system cannot recognize every variation of each command. In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly state the desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in the short cut menu. INFORMATION Command Expression examples “Go Home” Navigate to my house. Take me home. “Enter an Address” I need a route to a street address. Give me a street. “Find ” Search for a around here. I need a route to a nearby . “Call ” Get me . Contact the phone of . “Dial ” Can you get me <3334445555>. Ring <3334445555>. “Play Artist ” Play the artist . I want to hear the band . “Play Album ” Switch to the album . 305 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ●If the command cannot be recognized completely, the command input screen will be displayed. (Search results will be shown based on the part of the command that was recognized.) EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR EACH FUNCTION 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION 3. COMMAND LIST Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.  Frequently used commands are listed in the following tables.  For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be displayed in the screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands may not be displayed in the screen.  The functions available may vary according to the system installed.  Voice recognition language can be changed. (P. 56) Basic Command Action “Help” Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands or operation methods “Go Back” Returns to the previous screen “Go to ” Displays the command list of the selected tab “More Hints” Displays more commonly used commands “Cancel” Cancels the voice command system Apps* When the voice recognition language is set to English. Command “Launch ” *: With navigation function 306 LS460_600h_Navi_U Action Activates the LEXUS App Suite application 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION Navi*1 Command Action “Find ” Displays a list of near the current position*3 “Enter an Address” Enables setting a destination by saying the address “Go Home” Displays the route to home “Pause Guidance” Stops the route guidance “Resume Guidance” Resumes the route guidance “Show icons” Displays the specified POI icons “Delete Destination” Deletes the destination “Previous Destination” Displays previous destinations 5 Phone Command Action “Redial” Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing call “Call Back” Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call “Show Recent Calls” Displays the call history screen “Dial ” Places a call to the said phone number “Call ” Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from the phone book 307 LS460_600h_Navi_U VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM *1: With navigation function *2: For example; “Gas stations”, “Restaurants”, etc. *3: Depending on the search results, a POI list may be provided by a relevant POI application of the LEXUS App suite. (P. 394) 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION Radio Command Action “Tune to AM” Changes the radio to the specified AM frequency “Tune to FM” Changes the radio to the specified FM frequency “Play station” Changes the radio to an FM station of the specified genre “Tune to FM HD ” Changes the radio to the specified HD radio station “Tune to preset ” Changes the radio to the specified preset radio station “Tune to ” Changes the radio to the satellite radio channel with the specified name “Tune to channel ” Changes the radio to the specified satellite radio channel number “Play satellite station” Changes the radio to a satellite radio channel of the specified genre “AM Radio” Selects AM radio mode “FM Radio” Selects FM radio mode “Sirius XM” Selects satellite radio mode 308 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION Audio Command Action Plays tracks from the selected playlist “Play Artist ” Plays tracks from the selected artist “Play Song ” Plays the selected track “Play Album ” Plays tracks from the selected album “Turn Music On” Turns the audio system on “Turn Music Off” Turns the audio system off “Disc” Selects the selected disc mode “USB” Selects USB audio mode “iPod” Selects iPod audio mode “Bluetooth* Audio” Selects Bluetooth® audio mode “External” Selects VTR mode “Auxiliary” Selects AUX audio mode 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM “Play Playlist ” *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Info* Command Action “Destination Assist” Connects the system to the Lexus response center “Show Forecast” Displays weather information “Show Traffic” Displays traffic information “Lexus Insider” Displays the Lexus insider list *: With navigation function 309 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION Climate Command Action “Turn Climate Control On” Turns air conditioning system on “Turn Climate Control Off” Turns air conditioning system off “Warmer” Increases the temperature of the air conditioning system “Cooler” Decreases the temperature of the air conditioning system “<#> degrees” Changes the set temperature of the air conditioning system to <#> degrees* *: Only within the possible temperature range of the air conditioning system INFORMATION ●Commands relating to operation of the audio/visual and air conditioning systems can only be performed when the audio and air conditioning systems are turned on. 310 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION 1. MOBILE ASSISTANT The Mobile Assistant feature will activate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free mode via the steering wheel switches. To operate the Mobile Assistant, a compatible cellular phone must be registered and connected to this system via Bluetooth®. (P.39.) 1 Press and hold this switch until you hear the beeps. when the “Mobile Assistant” screen is displayed. INFORMATION ●The available features and functions may vary based on the iOS version installed on the connected device. ●Some Siri features are limited in Eyes Free mode. If you attempt to use an unavailable function, Siri will inform you that the function is not available. ●If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phone connected via Bluetooth®, an error message will be displayed on the screen. ●While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used. ●If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio source is Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction prompts.  To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select “Cancel”, or press and hold the on the steering wheel.  To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the on the steering wheel. • Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds to a voice command. • After some phone and music commands, the Mobile Assistant feature will automatically end to complete the requested action. 311 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 2 The Mobile Assistant can be used only  The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the “PWR·VOL” knob or steering wheel volume control switches. The Mobile Assistant and phone call volumes are synchronized. 2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION MICROPHONE It is not necessary to speak directly into the microphone when using the Mobile Assistant. (Microphone location: P.298.) INFORMATION ●Wait for the listening beeps before using the Mobile Assistant. ●The Mobile Assistant may not recognize commands in the following situations: • Spoken too quickly. • Spoken at a low or high volume. • The roof or windows are open. • Passengers are talking while the Mobile Assistant is being used. • The air conditioning speed is set high. • The air conditioning vents are turned toward the microphone. 312 LS460_600h_Navi_U 6 1 INFORMATION* 2 1 INFORMATION DISPLAY 3 1. RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION............ 314 4 DISPLAYING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION ......................... 314 2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS .............. 316 5 SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS .......... 316 6 7 8 9 10 *: This function is not made available on some models. 313 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. INFORMATION DISPLAY 1. RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION Doppler weather radar information can be received via HD Radio broadcast or by the LEXUS App Suite application on a Bluetooth® phone. For details about the LEXUS App Suite application: P. 387 4 Check that the “Weather” screen is displayed. DISPLAYING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION 1 Press the “MENU” button on the No. Function Select to display the weather of the current location. (P. 315) Remote Touch. Select to display the weather of a desired location in the recently checked locations list. Select to display the weather of a desired location in the national cities list. 2 Select “Info”. 3 Select “Weather”. Select to display the weather of a desired location in the other local cities list. * Select to display Doppler weather radar information over the map. *: With navigation function 314 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. INFORMATION DISPLAY DISPLAYING THE WEATHER OF THE CURRENT LOCATION 1 Display the “Weather” screen. (P. 314) 2 Select “Current Weather”. 3 Select the desired tab to be displayed.  When the “3 Day” tab is selected: When a specific day is selected, weather information for that day will be displayed. 6 INFORMATION 315 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. INFORMATION DISPLAY 2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS Data service information, which is comprised of traffic information and weather information, can be received via HD Radio broadcast and by the LEXUS App Suite application on a Bluetooth® phone. The receiving method can be set to both or only via HD Radio broadcast. For details about the LEXUS App Suite application: P. 387 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 3 Select “Data Services”. 4 Select the desired item to be set.  Select a checkbox on the right to set. No. Function Select to receive data service information via both HD Radio broadcast and the LEXUS App Suite application on a Bluetooth® phone. When both methods are available, HD Radio broadcast will be selected. Select to receive data only via HD Radio broadcast. 2 Select “Setup”. 316 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7 1 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 2 1 LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR 2 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST 3 1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ........... 334 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR .............................. 318 TYPES OF SENSORS.......................................... 334 DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................................ 318 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SWITCH.................................................................. 334 SCREEN DISPLAY ............................................... 320 DISPLAY .................................................................... 335 USING THE SYSTEM............................................ 321 THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND BUZZER ................................................................. 336 2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE ................................. 323 SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................................. 323 DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS.................................................... 338 PARKING ................................................................... 324 SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION................................................. 338 3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE ................................. 325 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST-SENSOR FAILURE WARNING............................................................ 340 SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................................. 325 CERTIFICATION................................................... 340 PARKING .................................................................. 326 4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS .......... 327 AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN................. 327 THE CAMERA ........................................................ 328 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL ROAD...................................... 329 5 6 7 8 9 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING................................... 341 SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME...................... 341 SETTING A PARKING SONAR DISPLAY................................................................... 341 SETTING A DISPLAY AND TONE INDICATION ....................................... 342 WHEN APPROACHING THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS......... 330 5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW..................................................... 332 IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS ......... 332 317 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 10 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR The parking assist monitor assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking. INFORMATION ●The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen. DRIVING PRECAUTIONS The parking assist monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. If you do not, you may hit another vehicle, and could possibly cause an accident. Pay attention to the following precautions when using the parking assist monitor. 318 LS460_600h_Navi_U CAUTION ●Never depend on the parking assist monitor entirely when backing up. The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state. Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle. ●Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. ●If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles, obstacles, people or mount the shoulder, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. ●The instructions given are only guidelines. When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the parking assist system. ●When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your vehicle before maneuvering into it. 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR CAUTION ●Do not use the parking assist monitor system in the following cases: • On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow • When using tire chains or emergency tires • When the trunk is not closed completely • On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes ●In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check all around the vehicle both directly and using the mirrors before proceeding. ●If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change. ●The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (P. 329) 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 319 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR SCREEN DISPLAY The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the “R” position while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode. CANCELING LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR The parking assist monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the “R” position. 320 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR USING THE SYSTEM Parking assist guide line display mode (P. 325) Use any of the following modes. The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed. Distance guide line display mode Estimated course line display mode (P. 323) Distance guide lines only are displayed. Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the operation of the steering wheel. 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 321 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR SWITCHING THE DISPLAY MODE 5 Select the display mode. When the shift lever is in any position other than the “R” position, the display mode can be changed in the following procedure. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Vehicle”. 4 Select “Backup Camera Guide Line Settings”. 322 LS460_600h_Navi_U No. Name Page/Detail Estimated course line display mode 323 Parking assist guide line display mode 325 Distance guide line display mode Distance guide lines only are displayed. 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR 2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE SCREEN DESCRIPTION No. Display Vehicle width guide line Function Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.  The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.  These guide lines align with the estimated course lines when the vehicle is going straight ahead. Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned. Distance guide lines Shows distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned.  The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course lines.  The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the bumper. Distance guide line Shows distance behind the vehicle.  Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper. Vehicle center guide line The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground. CAUTION ●If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. 323 LS460_600h_Navi_U PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM Estimated course lines 7 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PARKING 3 When the rear position of the vehicle has entered the parking space, turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle width guide lines are within the left and right dividing lines of the parking space. When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed. 1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” position. 2 Turn the steering wheel so that the esti- mated course lines are within the parking space, and back up slowly.  Vehicle width guide line 4 Once the vehicle width guide lines and the parking space lines are parallel, straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.  Parking space Estimated course lines 324 LS460_600h_Navi_U 5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking. 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR 3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE SCREEN DESCRIPTION No. Display Function Parking assist guide lines Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.  Shows the approximate position of the steering wheel when parking. Distance guide line Shows distance behind the vehicle.  Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper. Vehicle center guide line The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground. 325 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM Vehicle width guide line Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.  The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width. 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PARKING 3 Turn the steering wheel all the way to When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed. 4 Once the vehicle is parallel with the 1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” position. 2 Back up until the parking assist guide line meets the edge of the left-hand dividing line of the parking space.  Parking assist guide line Parking space dividing line 326 LS460_600h_Navi_U the right, and back up slowly. parking space, straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space. 5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking. 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR 4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN The parking assist monitor displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle. Displayed area INFORMATION ●The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions. ●Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed. ●The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. ●Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor. 7 Screen PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM Corners of bumper  The image adjustment procedure for the parking assist monitor screen is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen. (P. 37) 327 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR THE CAMERA The camera for the parking assist monitor is located as shown in the illustration. USING THE CAMERA If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth. 328 LS460_600h_Navi_U NOTICE ●The parking assist monitor may not operate properly in the following cases. • If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera may change. • As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation. • When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image. • Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or a glass coating to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible. • If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally. • When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning. ●Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL ROAD  The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.  The distances between the vehicle width guide lines and the left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.  The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road. WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP SHARPLY The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road. 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 329 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN SHARPLY The distance guide lines will appear to be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guide lines and the actual distance/course on the road. WHEN ANY PART OF THE VEHICLE SAGS When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road. A margin of error WHEN APPROACHING THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS The estimated course lines target flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the estimated course lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following. 330 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR ESTIMATED COURSE LINES Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the estimated course lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the estimated course lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the estimated course lines, the vehicle may hit the truck. DISTANCE GUIDE LINES Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking at point B. However, in reality if you back up to point A, you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that A is closest and C is farthest away. However, in reality, the distance to A and C is the same, and B is farther than A and C. Positions of A, B and C C 7 AB  Estimated course lines 331 LS460_600h_Navi_U PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM C B A 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR 5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution, and re-check. If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. Symptom Likely cause Solution The image is difficult to see  The vehicle is in a dark area  The temperature around the lens is either high or low  The outside temperature is low  There are water droplets on the camera  It is raining or humid  Foreign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to the camera  Sunlight or headlights are shining directly into the camera  The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc. Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. (Use the monitor again once conditions have been improved.) The procedure for adjusting the picture quality of the parking assist monitor is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen. (P. 37) The image is blurry Dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to the camera. Flush the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth. The image is out of alignment The camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. The guide lines are very far out of alignment The camera position is out of alignment. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.  The vehicle is tilted. (There is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due to a tire puncture, etc.)  The vehicle is used on an incline. If this happens due to these causes, it does not indicate a malfunction. Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings. There is a malfunction in the signals being output by the steering sensor. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. The estimated course lines move even though the steering wheel is straight 332 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR Symptom Likely cause Solution Guide lines are not displayed The trunk is open. Close the trunk. If this does not resolve the symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. The estimated course lines are not displayed  12-volt battery has been reinstalled.  The steering wheel has been moved while the 12volt battery was being reinstalled.  12-volt battery power is low.  The steering sensor has been reinstalled.  There is a malfunction in the signals being output by the steering sensor. Stop the vehicle, and turn the steering wheel as far as it will go to the left and right. If this does not resolve the symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 333 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST 1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via the display and a buzzer when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when using this system. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SWITCH 1 Turn the intuitive parking assist on/off. TYPES OF SENSORS  When on, the indicator light comes on to inform the driver that the system is operational. Front side sensors Front corner sensors Front center sensors Rear corner sensors Rear center sensors 334 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST DISPLAY ■ SCREEN DISPLAY When the sensors detect an obstacle, the graphic is shown on the multi-information display and screen display according to position and distance to the obstacle. ■ MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY : Select to mute the buzzer sounds. This function is available when the vehicle is moving forward.  The graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is detected. The screen can be set so that the graphic is not displayed. (P. 341) 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM Front side and front corner sensors operation Front center sensors operation Rear corner sensors operation Rear center sensors operation 335 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND BUZZER When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. ■ CORNER SENSORS AND SIDE SENSORS Level 1 2 3 4 Display example  Buzzer  Medium Fast Continuous 1 2 3 4 Slow Medium Fast Continuous ■ CENTER SENSORS Level Display example Buzzer 336 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ■ DETECTION LEVEL AND APPROXIMATE DISTANCE TO AN OBSTACLE Level 1 2 3 4 Front side sensors  1.6 to 1.2 ft. (50 to 37.5 cm) 1.2 to 1.0 ft. (37.5 to 30 cm) 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less Front corner sensors  2.0 to 1.2 ft. (60 to 37.5 cm) 1.2 to 1.0 ft. (37.5 to 30 cm) 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less Front center sensors 3.3 to 1.6 ft. (100 to 50 cm) 1.6 to 1.2 ft. (50 to 37.5 cm) 1.2 to 1.0 ft. (37.5 to 30 cm) 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less Rear corner sensors  2.0 to 1.2 ft. (60 to 37.5 cm) 1.2 to 0.8 ft. (37.5 to 25 cm) 0.8 ft. (25 cm) or less Rear center sensors 4.9 to 2.0 ft. (150 to 60 cm) 2.0 to 1.5 ft. (60 to 45 cm) 1.5 to 1.1 ft. (45 to 35 cm) 1.1 ft. (35 cm) or less INFORMATION 7 ●Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (P. 341) PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 337 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST DETECTION RANGE OF THE SENSORS SENSOR DETECTION INFORMATION Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below. Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)  The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.  The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc. 338 LS460_600h_Navi_U  There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.  A sensor is frozen.  A sensor is covered in any way.  The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.  On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass  The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.  There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist-sensors in the vicinity.  A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.  The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.  Towing eyelets are installed.  A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact. 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST  The vehicle is approaching a tall or rightangled curb.  In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.  A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.  In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are. ●Caution when using the intuitive parking assist-sensor Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident. • Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h). • Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range. ●Even though sensors which are functioning properly continue to detect obstacles, never use the intuitive parking assist if one more sensor(s) may be malfunctioning. 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM  The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles: • Wires, fences, ropes, etc. • Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves • Sharply-angled objects • Low obstacles • Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle CAUTION 339 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST NOTICE ●Notes when washing the vehicle • Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning. ●As the intuitive parking assist-sensor might be malfunctioning in the following cases, have it checked by your Lexus dealer. • The graphic which indicates that an obstacle has been detected does not come on and a beep does not sound even when the intuitive parking assist mode is turned on. • The graphic which indicates that an obstacle has been detected comes on despite no obstacle around the vehicle. • If your vehicle has been involved in an accident. • If the graphic which indicates that an obstacles has been detected remains on without a beeping sound. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSISTSENSOR FAILURE WARNING If an error is detected when the intuitive parking assist-sensor is turned on, the vehicle symbol comes on or flashes with beeping sounds. 340 LS460_600h_Navi_U INFORMATION ●The intuitive parking assist-sensor failure warning display is not given in either of the following operations: • Changing to another screen • Turning off the main switch for the intuitive parking assist-sensor IF THE FAILURE WARNING APPEARS :This symbol indicates that a sensor is covered with foreign matter such as snow or mud. Remove the foreign matter from the sensor. If the failure warning does not go off even after the foreign matter is removed, the intuitive parking assist-sensor may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. :This symbol indicates that the intuitive parking assist-sensor is malfunctioning. Have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. CERTIFICATION For vehicles sold in Canada.  This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.  Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada. 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING The volume of the beeps, turning on or off of the display, etc. can be set. SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME 1 Press the “MENU” button on the The alert volume can be adjusted. Remote Touch. 1 Display the “LEXUS Park Assist Settings” screen. (P. 341) 2 Select the desired screen button. 2 3 4 5 Select “Setup”. Select “Vehicle”. Select “LEXUS Park Assist”. Select the desired button.  The volume has 5 levels, increasing with higher value. Parking sonar display can be set to on or off. 1 Display the “LEXUS Park Assist Settings” screen. (P. 341) 2 Select “Display Off” to turn off the parking sonar display. 341 LS460_600h_Navi_U 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM SETTING A PARKING SONAR DISPLAY 2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING A DISPLAY AND TONE INDICATION Front and back sensors display and tone indication can be set. 1 Display the “LEXUS Park Assist Settings” screen. (P. 341) 2 Select “Front” or “Rear”.  Selecting “Front” or “Rear” to switch the distance for the front or back sensors display and tone indication, from long distance to short distance, or from short distance to long distance. 342 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8 1 PHONE 2 1 PHONE OPERATION (HANDSFREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) 1. QUICK REFERENCE ........................... 344 2. SOME BASICS ........................................ 345 REGISTERING/CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE..................................... 346 USING THE PHONE SWITCH/MICROPHONE ........................... 346 5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE............................ 356 3 INCOMING CALL WAITING....................... 358 4 6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION.................... 359 RECEIVING A MESSAGE ............................... 360 CHECKING MESSAGES................................... 361 REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY)................................................. 362 CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER ......... 363 5 6 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM....................... 347 ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT LIST....................................... 348 7 2 SETUP WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE ............................................. 348 1. PHONE SETTINGS................................ 364 3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE............................ 349 “Contacts/Call History” SCREEN .................. 366 BY FAVORITES LIST ........................................... 350 “Notifications” SCREEN ....................................... 374 “Sounds” SCREEN ................................................. 365 “Messaging” SCREEN........................................... 373 8 9 BY CALL HISTORY ............................................. 350 BY CONTACTS LIST ............................................ 351 BY DIAL PAD .......................................................... 353 BY OFF HOOK SWITCH ................................. 354 10 3 WHAT TO DO IF... 1. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................ 375 4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE............................ 355 INCOMING CALLS............................................ 355 343 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) 1. QUICK REFERENCE The phone top screen can be reached by the following methods: Using the steering wheel. Press the switch on the steering wheel. From the “Menu” screen Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”. Function Phone operation Page Registering/connecting Bluetooth® device 39 Calling on the Bluetooth® phone 349 Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone 355 ® Message function Setting up a phone 344 LS460_600h_Navi_U Talking on the Bluetooth phone 356 Using the Bluetooth® phone message function 359 Phone settings 364 ® Bluetooth settings 45 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) 2. SOME BASICS The hands-free system enables calls to be made and received without having to take your hands off the steering wheel. Bluetooth®. This system supports Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that enables cellular phones to be used without being connected by a cable or placed in a cradle. The operating procedure of the phone is explained here. CAUTION ●Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may rise to a level that could damage the phone. INFORMATION ●If your cellular phone does not support Bluetooth®, this system cannot function. ●In the following conditions, the system may not function: • The cellular phone is turned off. • The current position is outside the communication area. • The cellular phone is not connected. • The cellular phone has a low battery. ●When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time, the following problems may occur: • The Bluetooth® connection may be cut. • Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback. 345 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8 PHONE ●While driving, do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone. ●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. ●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. NOTICE 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) REGISTERING/ CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE To use the hands-free system for cellular phones, it is necessary to register a cellular phone with the system. (P. 39) USING THE PHONE SWITCH/ MICROPHONE Steering switch By pressing the phone switch, a call can be received or ended without taking your hands off the steering wheel. Bluetooth® PHONE CONDITION DISPLAY The condition of the Bluetooth® phone appears on the upper right side of the screen. (P. 16) Volume control switch  Press the “+” side to increase the volume.  Press the “-” side to decrease the volume. Off hook switch On hook switch 346 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) Microphone The microphone is used when talking on the phone. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM Press this switch to operate the voice command system. INFORMATION  The voice command system and its list of commands can be operated. (P. 298) 347 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8 PHONE ●The other party’s voice will be heard from the front speakers. The audio/visual system will be muted during phone calls or when hands-free voice commands are used. ●Talk alternately with the other party on the phone. If both parties speak at the same time, the other party may not hear what has been said. (This is not a malfunction.) ●Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the other party’s voice may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may increase. When talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone. ●The other party may not hear you clearly when: • Driving on an unpaved road. (Making excessive traffic noise.) • Driving at high speeds. • The roof or windows are open. • The air conditioning vents are pointed towards the microphone. • The sound of the air conditioning fan is loud. • There is a negative effect on sound quality due to the phone and/or network being used. 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT LIST  The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connected, the following registered data cannot be read: • Contact data • Call history data • Favorites data • Image data • All phone settings • Message settings INFORMATION ●When a phone’s registration is deleted, the above-mentioned data is also deleted. WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE A lot of personal data is registered when the hands-free system is used. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize the data. (P. 61)  The following data in the system can be initialized: • Contact data • Call history data • Favorites data • Image data • All phone settings • Message settings INFORMATION ●Once initialized, the data and settings will be erased. Pay much attention when initializing the data. 348 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) 3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE After a Bluetooth® phone has been registered, a call can be made using the hands-free system. There are several methods by which a call can be made, as described below. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Phone”. 3 Select the desired tab to call from.  The phone top screen can be displayed by pressing the switch on the steering wheel. How to make a call list Page By favorites list 350 By call history 350 By contacts list*1 351 By dial pad*1 353 By e-mail/SMS/MMS 363 By POI call 83 By off hook switch 354 By LEXUS App Suite*2 399 By voice command system 303 By quick dial 414 : The operation cannot be performed while driving. *2: With navigation function 349 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8 PHONE *1 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) BY FAVORITES LIST BY CALL HISTORY Calls can be made using registered contacts which can be selected from a contact list. (P. 371) Up to 30 of the latest call history items (missed, incoming and outgoing) can be selected from the “Call History” tab. 1 Display the phone top screen. 1 Display the phone top screen. 2 Select the “Favorites” tab and select the 2 Select the “Call History” tab and select 3 Select the desired number. 4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-  The icons of call type are displayed. (P. 349) desired contact. played. (P. 349) or the desired contact. : Missed call : Incoming call : Outgoing call When is selected 3 Check that the “Call” screen is dis- played. When the desired contact is selected 3 Select the desired number. 4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed. 350 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) INFORMATION ●When making a call to the same number continuously, only the most recent call is listed in call history. ●When a phone number registered in the contact list is received, the name is displayed. ●Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system. ●International phone calls may not be made depending on the type of cellular phone you have. ●The list should group together consecutive entries with the same phone number and same call type. For example, two calls from John’s mobile would be displayed as follows: John (2) ●By pressing the switch on the steering wheel, a call to the latest history item can be made. BY CONTACTS LIST Calls can be made by using contact data which is transferred from a registered cellular phone. (P. 352) Up to 2500 contacts (maximum of 4 phone numbers and e-mail addresses per contact) can be registered in the contact list. 1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 349) 2 Select the “Contacts” tab and select the desired contact. 3 Select the desired number. 4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed. 8 PHONE 351 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) WHEN THE CONTACT IS EMPTY ■ FOR PBAP COMPATIBLE ® Bluetooth PHONES When “Automatic Transfer” is set to on (P. 366) ■ FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUT OPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth® PHONES 1 Select the desired item.  Contacts are transferred automatically. When “Automatic Transfer” is set to off (P. 366) 1 Select the desired item. No. Function Select to transfer the contacts from the connected cellular phone. Select to add a new contact manually. Select to cancel transferring. No. Function Select to always transfer all the contacts from a connected cellular phone automatically. Select to transfer all the contacts from a connected cellular phone only once. Select to cancel transferring. 2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. 352 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) When “Transfer” is selected 2 Follow the steps in “When the contact is not registered” from “STEP 2”. (P. 368) When “Add” is selected 2 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”. (P. 370) INFORMATION ●If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred. ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone: • It may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone when transferring contact data. • The registered image in the contact list may not transfer depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone connected. BY DIAL PAD 1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 349) 2 Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter the phone number. 3 Select or press the the steering wheel. switch on 4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed. INFORMATION ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone. 8 PHONE 353 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) BY OFF HOOK SWITCH Calls can be made using the latest call history item. 1 Press the switch on the steering wheel to display the phone top screen. 2 Press the switch on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen. 3 Press the switch on the steering wheel to call the latest history item. 4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed. 354 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) 4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE INCOMING CALLS When a call is received, this screen is displayed with a sound. This screen can also be displayed on the “Side Display”. (P. 411) 1 Select or press the switch on the steering wheel to talk on the phone. INFORMATION ●During international phone calls, the other party’s name or number may not be displayed correctly depending on the type of cellular phone you have. ●The ringtone that has been set in the “Sounds” screen sounds when there is an incoming call. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, both the system and Bluetooth® phone may sound simultaneously when there is an incoming call. (P. 365) ●The incoming call display mode can be set. (P. 374) To refuse to receive the call: Select or press the switch on the steering wheel. To adjust the volume of a received call: Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering wheel. 8 PHONE 355 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) 5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE While talking on the phone, this screen is displayed. The operations outlined below can be performed on this screen. This screen can also be displayed on the “Side Display”. (P. 411) No. Function Page Select to display the dial pad to send tones. 357 Select to mute your voice to the other party.  Select to change handset modes between hands-free and cellular phone.  Select to adjust your voice volume that the other party hears from their speaker. 358 Select to send tones. This button only appears when a number that contains a (w) is dialed in hands-free mode. 357 Select to hang up the phone.  Select “+” or “-” to adjust the volume of the other party’s voice.  Select to start talking with the other party. 358 356 LS460_600h_Navi_U INFORMATION ●When cellular phone call is changed to hands-free call, the hands-free screen will be displayed and its functions can be operated on the screen. ●Changing between cellular phone call and hands-free call can be performed by operating the cellular phone directly. ●Transferring methods and operations will be different depending on the type of cellular phone you have. ●For the operation of the cellular phone, see the manual that comes with it. ●This screen can be displayed on the “Main Display” or “Side Display”. (P. 374) 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) SENDING TONES ■ BY DIAL PAD This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Select “0-9”. 2 Enter the desired number. ■ BY SELECTING “Release Tones” “Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w) is registered in the contact list. 1 Select “Release Tones”. INFORMATION ●A continuous tone signal is a character string that consists of numbers and the characters p or w. (e.g. 056133w0123p#1) ●When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have elapsed. When the “w” pause tone is used, the tone data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after a user operation is performed. ●Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based service such as an answering machine or bank phone service is desired. A phone number with continuous tone signals can be registered in the contact list. ●Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be operated on voice command during a call. 8 PHONE 357 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING 1 Select “Transmit Volume”. 2 Select the desired level for the transmit volume. “Default”: Select to reset the transmit volume. 3 Select “OK”. INFORMATION ●The sound quality of the voice heard from the other party’s speaker may be negatively impacted. ●“Transmit Volume” is dimmed when mute is on. INCOMING CALL WAITING When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, the incoming screen is displayed. The incoming screen can also be displayed on the “Side Display”. (P. 411) 1 Select or press the switch on the steering wheel to start talking with the other party. To refuse to receive the call: Select or press the switch on the steering wheel.  Each time is selected or the switch on the steering wheel is pressed during an interrupted call, the party who is on hold will be switched. INFORMATION ●This function may not be available depending on the type of cellular phone. ●This screen can be displayed on the “Main Display” or “Side Display”. (P. 374) 358 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) 6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION Received messages can be forwarded from the connected Bluetooth® phone, enabling checking and replying using the system. 3 Select Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone connected, received messages may not be transferred to the message inbox. If the phone does not support the message function, this function cannot be used. 4 Check that the message inbox screen is 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. .  The phone top screen can be displayed by pressing the switch on the steering wheel. displayed. : Select to change to phone mode. Function Page Receiving a message 360 Checking messages 361 Replying to a message (quick reply) 362 Calling the message sender 363 Message settings 373 8 PHONE 2 Select “Phone”. 359 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) RECEIVING A MESSAGE When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen pops up with sound and is ready to be operated on the screen. INFORMATION ●Depending on the cellular phone used for receiving messages, or its registration status with the system, some information may not be displayed. ●The pop up screen is separately available for incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS messages under the following conditions: E-mail: • “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on. (P. 374) SMS/MMS: • “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set to on. (P. 374) No. Function Select to check the message. Select to not open the message. Select to call the message sender. 360 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) CHECKING MESSAGES 1 Display the message inbox screen. (P. 359) 2 Select the desired message from the list. 3 Check that the message is displayed. No. Function Select “Mark Unread” or “Mark Read” to mark e-mail unread or read on the message inbox screen. This function is available when “Update Message Read Status on Phone” is set to on. (P. 373) INFORMATION ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone. ●Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth® phone’s registered mail address folder. Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed. ●Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth® phone can be displayed. ●The text of the message is not displayed while driving. ●Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering wheel to adjust the message read out volume. 8 PHONE Select to reply the message. (P. 362) Select to display the previous or next message. Select to have messages read out. To cancel this function, select “Stop”. When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, messages will be automatically read out. (P. 373) Select to make a call to the sender. 361 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY) ■ EDITING QUICK REPLY MESSAGES 15 messages have already been stored. This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Display the message inbox screen. 1 Select “Quick Msg”. 2 3 4 5 2 Select (P. 359) Select the desired message from the list. Select “Quick Msg”. Select the desired message. Select “Send”. “Cancel”: Select to cancel sending the message.  While the message is being sent, a sending message screen is displayed. 6 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.  If an error message is displayed, follow the guidance on the screen to try again. corresponding to the desired message to edit. 3 Select “OK” when editing is completed. INFORMATION ●To reset the edited quick reply messages, select “Default”. ●“Quick Message 1” (“I am driving and will arrive in approximately [ETA] minutes.”)*: This message cannot be edited and will automatically fill in [ETA] with the navigation calculated estimated time of arrival on the confirm message screen. If there are waypoints set, [ETA] to the next waypoint will be shown. If there is no route currently set in the navigation system, “Quick Message 1” cannot be selected. *: With navigation function 362 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/ MMS message sender’s phone number. This operation can be performed while driving. ■ CALLING FROM E-MAIL/SMS/ MMS MESSAGE DISPLAY 1 Display the message inbox screen. (P. 359) ■ CALLING FROM A NUMBER WITHIN A MESSAGE Calls can be made to a number identified in a message’s text area. This operation cannot be performed while driving. 1 Display the message inbox screen. (P. 359) 2 Select the desired message. 3 Select the text area. 2 Select the desired message. 3 Select “Call”.  If there are 2 or more phone numbers, select the desired number. 4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed. 4 Select the desired number. 5 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed. INFORMATION ●A series of numbers may be recognized as a phone number. Additionally, some phone numbers may not be recognized, such as those for other countries. ■ CALLING FROM THE INCOMING MESSAGE SCREEN P. 360 363 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8 PHONE  Identified phone numbers contained in the message are displayed. 2. SETUP 1. PHONE SETTINGS 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 4 Select the item to be set. No. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Phone”. Information Page Registering/connecting a phone 45 * Sound settings 365 * Contact/call history settings 366 * Message settings 373 * Notification settings 374 *: This operation cannot be performed while driving. DISPLAYING THE PHONE SETTINGS SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY 1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 349) 2 Select “Settings”. 364 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. SETUP “Sounds” SCREEN The call and ringtone volume can be adjusted. A ringtone can be selected. 1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 364) 2 Select “Sounds”. 3 Select the desired item to be set. No. Function Select to set the desired ringtone. Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ringtone volume. Select “-” or “+” to adjust the default volume of the other party’s voice. Select to set the desired incoming SMS/MMS tone. Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming SMS/MMS tone volume. Select to set the desired incoming email tone. Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume. Select “-” or “+” to adjust the message readout volume. Select to reset all setup items. 8 ●Depending on the type of phone, certain functions may not be available. 365 LS460_600h_Navi_U PHONE INFORMATION 2. SETUP “Contacts/Call History” SCREEN No. Function Page For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones: Select to change the contact/history transfer settings. 367 Select to update contacts from the connected phone. 368 Select to sort contacts by the first name or last name field.  Select to add contacts to the favorites list. 371 Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. 372 * Select to clear contacts from the call history.  * Select to add new contacts to the contact list. 370 * Select to edit contacts in the contact list. 370 * Select to delete contacts from the contact list. 371 Select to reset all setup items.  The contact can be transferred from a Bluetooth® phone to the system. If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred. The contact also can be added, edited and deleted. The call history can be deleted and contact and favorites can be changed. 1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 364) 2 Select “Contacts/Call History”. 3 Select the desired item to be set. *: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 366) 366 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. SETUP INFORMATION ●Depending on the type of phone, certain functions may not be available. ●Contact data is managed independently for every registered phone. When one phone is connected, another phone’s registered data cannot be read. SETTING AUTOMATIC CONTACT/HISTORY TRANSFER The automatic contact/history function is available for PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones only. 1 Select “Automatic Transfer”. 2 Select the desired item to be set. No. Function Select to update contacts from the connected phone. (P. 368) Select to set the transferred contact image display on/off. The contact image cannot be displayed on the “Side Display” when a call is received. Select to reset all setup items. 367 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8 PHONE Select to set automatic contact/history transfer on/off. When set to on, the phone’s contact data and history are automatically transferred. 2. SETUP ■ UPDATING CONTACTS FROM PHONE 1 Select “Update Now”. When the contact is not registered  Contacts are transferred automatically. 2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.  This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.  Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.  If another Bluetooth® device is connected when transferring contact data, depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth® device may need to be disconnected. ®  Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone. 368 LS460_600h_Navi_U TRANSFER CONTACTS FROM PHONE 1 Select “Transfer Contacts from Phone”. 2 Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth® phone.  This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.  Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.  To cancel this function, select “Cancel”. 3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. 2. SETUP When the contact is registered 1 Select “Transfer Contacts from Phone”. 2 Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contact”. “Replace Contacts”: Select to transfer the contact from the connected cellular phone and replace the current one. “Add Contact”: Select to transfer the desired contact data from the connected cellular phone to add to the current one. 3 Transfer the contact data to the system using a Bluetooth® phone.  This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of cellular phone.  Depending on the type of cellular phone, OBEX authentication may be required when transferring contact data. Enter “1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.  To cancel this function, select “Cancel”. ■ UPDATING THE CONTACTS (FROM THE “Call History” SCREEN)* 1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 349) 2 Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list. 3 Select “Update Contact”. 4 Select the desired contact. 5 Select a phone type for the phone number. *: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (P. 366) 8 4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis- PHONE played when the operation is complete. 369 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. SETUP REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can be registered. 1 Select “New Contact”. 2 Enter the name and select “OK”. 3 Enter the phone number and select “OK”. 4 Select the phone type for the phone number. EDITING THE CONTACT DATA 1 Select “Edit Contact”. 2 Select the desired contact. 3 Select the desired name or number. For editing the name 4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”. (P. 370) For editing the number 4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A 5 To add another number to this contact, NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 3”. (P. 370) ■ REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT IN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE “Call History” SCREEN) ■ EDITING THE CONTACT IN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE “Contact Details” SCREEN) 1 Display the phone top screen. 1 Display the phone top screen. select “Yes”. (P. 349) 2 Select the “Call History” tab and select a contact not yet registered in the contact list. 3 Select “Add to Contacts”. 4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”. (P. 370) 370 LS460_600h_Navi_U (P. 349) 2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” or “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact. 3 Select “Edit Contact”. “E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for the contact. 4 Follow the steps in “EDITING THE CONTACT DATA” from “STEP 3”. (P. 370) 2. SETUP DELETING THE CONTACT DATA FAVORITES LIST SETTING 1 Select “Delete Contacts”. 2 Select the desired contact and select Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be registered in the favorites list. 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation ■ REGISTERING THE CONTACTS IN THE FAVORITES LIST “Delete”. screen appears. INFORMATION ●Multiple data can be selected and deleted at the same time. ■ DELETING THE CONTACT IN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE “Contact Details” SCREEN) 1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 349) 2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” or 3 Select “Delete Contact”. 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. favorites list.  Dimmed contacts are already stored as a favorite. 3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis- played when the operation is complete. When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list 1 When 15 contacts have already been registered to the favorites list, a regis8 tered contact needs to be replaced. Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears to replace a contact. 2 Select the contact to be replaced. 3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. INFORMATION ●When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, the contact data will be deleted at the same time. 371 LS460_600h_Navi_U PHONE “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact. 1 Select “Add Favorite”. 2 Select the desired contact to add to the 2. SETUP Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the “Contacts” screen) 1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 349) 2 Select the “Contacts” tab. 3 Select (grey) at the beginning of the desired contact list name to be registered in the favorites list. ■ DELETING THE CONTACTS IN THE FAVORITES LIST 1 Select “Remove Favorite”. 2 Select the desired contacts and select “Remove”. 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis- played when the operation is complete. Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the “Contacts” screen) 1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 349)  When selected, (grey) is changed to (yellow), and the contact is registered in the favorites list. Registering contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the “Contact Details” screen) 1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 349) 2 Select the “Contacts” or “Call History” tab and select the desired contact. 3 Select “Add Favorite”. 4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. 372 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2 Select the “Contacts” tab. 3 Select (yellow) at the beginning of the contact list name to be deleted from the favorites list.  When selected, (yellow) is changed to (grey), and the data is deleted from the list. 2. SETUP Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a different way (from the “Contact Details” screen) 1 Display the phone top screen. (P. 349) 2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” or “Favorites” tab and select the desired contact to delete. “Messaging” SCREEN 1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 364) 2 Select “Messaging”. 3 Select the desired item to be set. 3 Select “Remove Favorite”. 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete. No. Function Select to set automatic message transfer on/off. Select to set automatic message readout on/off. Select to set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off. When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone will be displayed. Select to set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing messages on/off. Select to reset all setup items. INFORMATION ●Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available. 373 LS460_600h_Navi_U 8 PHONE Select to set updating message read status on phone on/off. 2. SETUP “Notifications” SCREEN 1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 364) 2 Select “Notifications”. 3 Select the desired item to be set. No. Function Select to change where the screen is displayed between the “Main Display” and “Side Display”. “Main Screen”: Select to display and operate the screen on the “Main Display”. “Side Screen”: Select to display and operate the screen on the “Side Display”. For details of the screen: P. 415 Select to set the SMS/MMS notification popup on/off. Select to set the e-mail notification popup on/off. Select to change the incoming SMS/ MMS display. “Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, the incoming SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the screen. “Drop-Down”: When an SMS/ MMS message is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen. Select to change the incoming email display. “Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display screen is the displayed and can be operated on the screen. “Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on the upper side of the screen. Select to set display of the contact/ history transfer completion message on/off. Select to reset all setup items. INFORMATION ●Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available. 374 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. WHAT TO DO IF... 1. TROUBLESHOOTING If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first check the table below. When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device Page Symptom The hands-free system or Bluetooth® device does not work. Likely cause Solution Cellular phone This system The connected device may not be a compatible Bluetooth® cellular phone. For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system, check with your Lexus dealer or the following website: http:// www.lexus.com/ MobileLink   The Bluetooth® version of the connected cellular phone may be older than the specified version. Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth® version 2.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 3.0 +EDR or higher).  43 8 PHONE 375 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. WHAT TO DO IF... When registering/connecting a cellular phone Page Symptom A cellular phone cannot be registered. A Bluetooth® connection cannot be made. Likely cause Solution An incorrect passcode was entered on the cellular phone. Cellular phone This system Enter the correct passcode on the cellular phone.   The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular phone side. Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve registration on the phone).   Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone. Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system.  48 Another Bluetooth® device is already connected. Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system.  48 Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable the ® Bluetooth function on the cellular phone.   Automatic Bluetooth® connection on this system is set to off. Set automatic Bluetooth® connection on this system to on when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.  53 Set preferred device settings function on this system to off.  53 Set the desired cellular phone to the highest automatic connection priority.  53 Preferred device settings function on this system is set to on. 376 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. WHAT TO DO IF... Page Symptom “Unable to dial. Please check your phone.” message is displayed. Likely cause Solution Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Old registration information remains on either this system or the cellular phone. Cellular phone This system Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.   Delete the existing registration information from both this system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone you wish to connect to this system.  48 When making/receiving a call Page Likely cause Solution A call cannot be made/received. Your vehicle is in a “No Service” area. Move to where “No Service” no longer appears on the display. Cellular phone This system 8   PHONE Symptom 377 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. WHAT TO DO IF... When using the phonebook Page Symptom Phonebook data cannot be transferred manually/automatically. Phonebook data cannot be edited. 378 LS460_600h_Navi_U Likely cause Solution Cellular phone This system The profile version of the connected cellular phone may not be compatible with transferring phonebook data. For a list of specific devices which operation has been confirmed on this system, check with your Lexus dealer or the following website: http:// www.lexus.com/ MobileLink   Automatic contact transfer function on this system is set to off. Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to on.  366 Passcode has not been entered on the cellular phone. Enter the passcode on the cellular phone if requested (default passcode: 1234).   Transfer operation on the cellular phone has not completed. Complete transfer operation on the cellular phone (approve transfer operation on the phone).   Automatic contact transfer function on this system is set to on. Set automatic contact transfer function on this system to off.  366 3. WHAT TO DO IF... When using the Bluetooth® message function Page Symptom Messages cannot be viewed. New message notifications are not displayed. Likely cause Solution Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone. Cellular phone This system Enable message transfer on the cellular phone (approve message transfer on the phone).   Automatic transfer function on this system is set to off. Set automatic transfer function on this system to on.  373 Notification of SMS/ MMS/E-mail reception on this system is set to off. Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail reception on this system to on.  374 Automatic message transfer function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable automatic transfer function on the cellular phone.   8 PHONE In other situations Page Symptom Likely cause Solution The Bluetooth® connection status is displayed at the top of the screen each time the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. Connection confirmation display on this system is set to on. To turn off the display, set connection confirmation display on this system to off. Cellular phone This system  52 379 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. WHAT TO DO IF... Page Symptom Likely cause Solution The cellular phone is not close enough to this system. Radio interference has occurred. Even though all conceivable measures have been taken, the symptom status does not change. The cellular phone is the most likely cause of the symptom. Cellular phone This system Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.   Turn off Wi-Fi® devices or other devices that may emit radio waves.   Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reinstall the battery pack, and then restart the cellular phone.   Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth® connection.   Disable the Wi-Fi® connection of the cellular phone.   Stop the cellular phone’s security software and close all applications.   Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its source and how its operation might affect this system.   : For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone. 380 LS460_600h_Navi_U 9 1 LEXUS ENFORM* 2 1 LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW 1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW............... 382 LEXUS Enform Remote....................................... 383 LEXUS Enform Service Connect .................... 383 2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE.................................................... 384 BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 386 PREPARATION BEFORE USING LEXUS App Suite................................................ 387 3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ......... 388 2 LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION 3 1. LEXUS Enform Remote......................... 392 2. LEXUS Enform Service Connect ....... 393 3. LEXUS App Suite..................................... 394 USING LEXUS App Suite.................................. 394 LINKING LEXUS App Suite AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM LOCAL FUNCTION .......................................................... 398 ENTERING KEYWORD OPERATION ....................................................... 399 5 6 7 4. LEXUS Enform Destinations................ 400 Destination Assist .................................................... 400 BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 389 eDestination................................................................. 401 4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM ................................... 391 5. Lexus Insider .............................................. 403 NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION.............. 403 VIEWING AND PLAYING RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES.............................. 403 3 SETUP 1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS.............. 406 SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS.............................................................. 406 LEXUS Enform connected services consists of five products:  LEXUS Enform Safety Connect  LEXUS Enform Service Connect  LEXUS Enform Remote  LEXUS Enform Destinations  LEXUS Enform App Suite For availability and to learn more, visit http://www.lexus.com/enform/. *: With navigation function 381 LS460_600h_Navi_U 4 8 9 10 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW 1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Lexus Enform is a service that includes Safety Connect, Service Connect, Remote, Destinations, Insider and App Suite.  The functions included in Lexus Enform are classified into the following three types. Type A: Function achieved by using a cellular phone Type B: Function achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communication Module) and the navigation system Type C: Function achieved by using DCM Function Type LEXUS App Suite Type A LEXUS Enform Destinations (Destination Assist, eDestination) Type B Lexus Insider Type B LEXUS Enform Safety Connect Type C  Each function is available in the following areas: • LEXUS App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. • LEXUS Enform Destinations is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and limited areas of Alaska for vehicles that contain the appropriate map data. • Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. • LEXUS Enform Safety Connect features include: Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Location (available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., Hawaii, Alaska, and Canada) and Enhanced Roadside Assistance (available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., Alaska, and Canada). INFORMATION ●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform service is dependent on network reception level. 382 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW LEXUS Enform Remote LEXUS Enform Remote is a cellular phone application that lets you view and remotely control certain aspects of your vehicle. For details about the functions and services of this application, refer to http:// www.lexus.com/enform/.  Function of the LEXUS Enform Remote is achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communication Module).  Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. LEXUS Enform Service Connect Lexus Enform Service Connect uses embedded telematics hardware to collect and transmit vehicle data that allows Lexus to provide: Vehicle Health Report (VHR) (Safety Recalls, Service Campaigns, Current Vehicle Alerts, Required Maintenance, and Vehicle Condition Status) Maintenance Notifications Vehicle Alert Notifications For details about this service and how to register, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. 383 LS460_600h_Navi_U 9 LEXUS ENFORM  The Lexus Enform Service Connect is achieved by using a Data Communication Module (DCM) built into the vehicle.  Lexus Enform Service Connect is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., Hawaii, Alaska, and Canada. 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW 2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE Of the functions included with Lexus Enform, the App Suite relies on the use of a cellular phone. App Suite enables applicable apps installed on a cellular phone to be displayed on and operated from the navigation screen via a Bluetooth®. A few settings must be performed before App Suite can be used. (P. 387) 384 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW No. Name Function Content provider Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone. Application server Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellular phone. Cellular phone* Using the App Suite, communication is relayed between the navigation system, application server and contents provider. The cellular phone cannot be operated while communicating. Applications Display usable content from the content providers on the screen using the data connection of the connected cellular phone. Navigation system Content received, via a cellular phone, from content provider servers is displayed on the navigation screen. The navigation system is equipped with an application player to run applications. *: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink. 9 LEXUS ENFORM 385 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION SUBSCRIPTION  User registration is required to start using the App Suite function. (P. 387)  App Suite does not require an activation fee or monthly recurring fees.  Services requiring a separate contract can also be used.* *: For details, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987. AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION  LEXUS App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. INFORMATION ●Data usage fees may apply while using App Suite function. Confirm data usage fees before using this function. ●The required operations to activate applications and connect a cellular phone to the navigation system, and the registration steps for the App Suite are explained in this section. For details regarding operation of the App Suite and the applications, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. ●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform service is dependent on network reception level. 386 LS460_600h_Navi_U INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA The personal data used in applications can be reset. (P. 61)  The following personal data can be deleted and returned to their default settings: • Downloaded contents • Radio stations that were listened to • Input history INFORMATION ●Once initialized, data will be erased. Pay close attention when initializing data. 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW PREPARATION BEFORE USING LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE LEXUS App Suite Perform the settings in the following order. 1 User registration USER REGISTRATION Perform user registration at http:// www.lexus.com/enform/ or register within the App Suite application after you download it onto your cellular phone. REGISTERING THE LEXUS App Suite APPLICATION 1 Download the App Suite application to 2 Download the App Suite application to your cellular phone. 3 Register the cellular phone with the navigation system. In order to use App Suite, the following must first be performed:  Register a Bluetooth® phone with the hands-free system. (P. 39) 2 Run the App Suite application on your cellular phone. 3 Enter the information required into the App Suite application. Login to the application. INFORMATION ●Applications can only be used when the App Suite application has been downloaded to your cellular phone and the application is running. ●App Suite operational procedures can also be confirmed by visiting http://www.lexus.com/enform/. ●In order to use applications, it is necessary to run the App Suite application on your cellular phone. ●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system operation may become unstable. For known phone compatibility information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. ●If a App Suite application is used while iPod audio/video is being played back, system operation may become unstable. 387 LS460_600h_Navi_U 9 LEXUS ENFORM  User registration with the service (P. 387)  Download the App Suite application onto your cellular phone, and login to the application. (P. 387)  Register the cellular phone, on which the App Suite application was installed, with the navigation system. (P. 387) your cellular phone. 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW 3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM The functionality of Lexus Enform Safety Connect, Lexus Enform Destinations, and Lexus Insider is made possible through the shared work of the DCM and the navigation system. These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as well as convenience features. These services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles and supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. 388 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION SUBSCRIPTION  After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987), for further subscription details. (P. 400) AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION(S)  Destinations is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and limited areas of Alaska for vehicles that contain the appropriate map data.  Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. ACTIVATION OF FUNCTION(S)  Enrollment in Lexus Enform Safety Connect (via your dealership) is required to activate all functions.  Certification for Lexus Enform Safety Connect FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101 FCC ID: XOECDMRF101B FCC ID: N7NGTM2 FCC WARNING This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). 9 LEXUS ENFORM 389 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW INFORMATION ●Exposure to radio frequency signals: The Lexus Enform system installed in your vehicle includes a low power radio transmitter and receiver. The system receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals. ●In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. • ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992] • NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement) Report 86 [1986] • ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996] ●These standards are based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, government health agencies, and industry reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1). ●The design of Lexus Enform system complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards. 390 LS460_600h_Navi_U INFORMATION ●Contact with the Lexus response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, navigation map data, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms are available; charges vary by subscription term selected. ●The Lexus response center offers support in multiple languages. ●Select Lexus Enform Safety Connectsubscribed vehicles are capable of communicating vehicle information. Please see the terms and conditions for additional details. Owners who do not wish to have their vehicle transmit this information can opt out at the time of enrollment or by calling 1-800-255-3987 and following the prompts for Lexus Enform Safety Connect. ●For further details about the service, contact your Lexus dealer. ●Lexus Enform functions are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the system is not TTY compatible. 1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW 4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM The functionality of Lexus Enform Safety Connect is made possible by the use of a DCM. For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”. 9 LEXUS ENFORM 391 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION 1. LEXUS Enform Remote For details about the functions and services provided by this app, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. SUBSCRIPTION  After you sign the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement (see the LEXUS Enform Safety Connect section in “Owner’s Manual”), download the LEXUS Enform Remote app from your cellular phone’s app store, and register within the app (or enroll and complete registration at the dealer), you can begin using these services.  A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1-80025-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) for further subscription details. AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION  Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., and Alaska. INFORMATION ●Lexus Enform Remote should only be used by authorized users. ●Laws in some communities may require that the vehicle be within view of the user when operating Lexus Enform Remote. In some states, use of Lexus Enform Remote may violate state or local laws. Before using Lexus Enform Remote, check your state and local laws. ●Any malfunction of the Lexus should be repaired by your Lexus dealer. ●Lexus Enform Remote is designed to work at temperatures above -22 F (-30 C). This specification is related to the Lexus Enform Remote operation, but is dependent on the vehicle’s operating temperature range which may be different. ●Content is subject to change without notice. ●Some features of the Lexus Enform Remote may not be available on some models. ●Additional information can be found at www.lexus.com/enform/. 392 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION 2. LEXUS Enform Service Connect For details about this service and how to register, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION  Lexus Enform Service Connect is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., Hawaii, Alaska, and Canada. INFORMATION ●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform Service Connect is dependent on network reception level. 9 LEXUS ENFORM 393 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION 3. LEXUS App Suite USING LEXUS App Suite 3 Select the desired application screen App Suite is a function that enables applicable apps installed on a cellular phone to be displayed on and operated from the navigation screen. Before App Suite can be used, a few settings need to be performed. (P. 387) For details about the functions and services provided by each application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. : Select to activate an application. “Update”: Select to update the applications. (P. 395) “Reorder”: Select to change the order of the applications. (P. 396) 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “LEXUS App Suite”. 394 LS460_600h_Navi_U button. : Displays the number of new notifications for the application 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION UPDATING AN APPLICATION When App Suite is activated, an application may need to be updated. By updating the application, it can be kept to the latest version. To update an application, it is necessary to download update data and install it. ■ DOWNLOADING UPDATE 3 Check that downloading is complete. “Later”: Select to install later. When this screen button is selected, the screen will return to the last displayed screen. To install the update data: P. 396 “See Detail”: Select to display detailed information on the update data. “Install”: Select to install the update data. Follow the steps “INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA” from “STEP 2”.(P. 396) If an update is available, “Update” can be selected. 1 Select “Update” on the “LEXUS App Suite” screen. (P. 394) 2 Check that downloading starts. “Download in Background”: Select to operate other functions while downloading. “Cancel”: Select to cancel updating. 9 LEXUS ENFORM 395 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION ■ INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA After the downloading is complete, “Update” will be changed to “Install”. 1 Select “Install” on the “LEXUS App Suite” screen. (P. 394) 2 Select “Continue”. “Later”: Select to postpone the installation of the update data and go back to the previous screen. 3 Check that installing is started. “Install in Background”: Select to operate other function while installing. 4 Select “OK” after the installing is complete. INFORMATION ●The App Suite function cannot be operated while installing. 396 LS460_600h_Navi_U REORDERING THE APPLICATIONS Order of the applications can be changed. 1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen. (P. 394) 2 Select “Reorder”. 3 Select the desired application to be moved. 4 Select “<<” or “>>” to move the application, and select “OK”. 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN When problems occur with starting the application player, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below, identify the problem and take the suggested corrective action. Display conditions Corrective action “This feature is unavailable during an emergency call.” Safety Connect is being implemented. After the Safety Connect call is finished, perform the operation again. “This feature is unavailable while transferring contacts.” Contacts are being transferred manually from the phonebook. When the transfer of contacts is complete, perform the operation again. “Unable to connect to a Bluetooth* phone. For troubleshooting assistance, please visit the Lexus website or contact your dealer.” The cellular phone cannot be connected. Refer to http:// www.lexus.com/enform/ to confirm if the phone is compatible or not. “This feature is unavailable during a handsfree call.” A hands-free call is in progress. After the hands-free call is finished, perform the operation. “To use the services, an active application needs to be running on your phone. For more information, please visit lexus.com.” The LEXUS App Suite application cannot be connected to Bluetooth® SPP. Refer to http:// www.lexus.com/enform/ to confirm if the phone is Bluetooth® SPP compatible or not, and then activate the App Suite application. “Communication error. Please try again.” Communication was disconnected. After a few moments, retry the operation. *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 397 LS460_600h_Navi_U 9 LEXUS ENFORM Message 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION LINKING LEXUS App Suite AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM LOCAL FUNCTION The setting a destination and making a hands-free call functions of the navigation system can be performed via App Suite. For details about the functions and services provided by each application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. SETTING A DESTINATION USING LEXUS App Suite Locations that were searched for using the App Suite can be set as a destination. 1 Display the “Web Search” screen. (P. 398) 2 Select the desired application screen button to perform search. 3 4 5 6 Enter a search term, and select “Go”. Select “Map”. Select “Go to ”. Select “OK” to start guidance.  For the operation of the route guidance screen and the function of each screen button: P. 101 2 Select “Dest.”. 3 Select “Web Search”. 4 Check that the “Web Search” screen is displayed. 398 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION MAKING A PHONE CALL USING LEXUS App Suite ENTERING A KEYWORD USING THE SOFTWARE KEYBOARD Phone calls can be made to locations which were searched for using App Suite. 1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen. 1 Display the “Web Search” screen. 2 Select the desired application screen 2 Select the desired application screen 3 Select the character entering space. 4 Enter a search term, and then select (P. 398) button to perform search. 3 Enter a search term, and select “Go”. 4 Select “Call”. 5 Select “Yes”. “Cancel”: Select to cancel making a phone call. 6 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.  For phone operation and the function of each screen button: P. 356 A keyword can be entered to an application by the software keyboard or voice recognition function. For details about the functions and services provided by each application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. button. “OK”. 5 Entering characters will be reflected on the character entering space.  For details on operating the keyboard: P. 34 ENTERING A KEYWORD USING THE VOICE RECOGNITION FUNCTION 1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen. (P. 394) 9 2 Select the desired application screen button. 3 Press the talk switch. (P. 298) 4 Say the desired keyword.  Completion of the keyword will be detected automatically. 5 Search results will be displayed on the screen.  The keyboard layout can be changed. (P. 56) 399 LS460_600h_Navi_U LEXUS ENFORM ENTERING KEYWORD OPERATION (P. 394) 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION 4. LEXUS Enform Destinations Destination Assist Destinations provide you with live assistance for finding destinations via the Lexus response center. You can request either a specific business, address, or ask for help locating your desired destination by category, such as restaurants, gas stations, shopping centers or other Points of Interest (POI). After you tell the agent your choice of destination, its coordinates are sent wirelessly to your vehicle’s navigation system. 4 When an agent comes on the line, tell the agent the address, business name, or the type of POI or service.  To adjust the call volume, select “-” or “+”, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel during the call.  To hang up the phone, select “Disconnect” or press the switch on the steering wheel. 5 After the agent helps you determine your location of choice, this screen is displayed. Select the screen button of the desired action. MAKE A CALL WITH Destination Assist 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. No. Function Select to register as a memory point. Select to set as a destination. Select to display detailed information. Select to call the registered number. 2 Select “Dest.”. 3 Select “Destination Assist”. 400 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION DOWNLOADING eDestinations eDestination With the eDestination feature, you can go online, and via the Lexus.com owner’s Web site, select and organize destinations of your choice and then wirelessly send them to your vehicle’s navigation system. Up to 200 locations can be stored online and accessed or updated at any time. After updating eDestination folders online, it is necessary to download the updated data to the vehicle. 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch.  Locations can be organized into up to 20 personalized folders. INFORMATION ●You must first go online at www.lexus.com/drivers/ to view the Owners site where you will need to register and log in. After this, personalized folders that contain the locations to be sent to your vehicle can be created. (See Lexus Enform Guide for more information.) 2 3 4 5 6 Select “Dest.”. Slect “Point of Interest”. Select “eDestination”. Select “Download”. 7 Check that downloading starts.  The most recent Destinations data will be loaded to the navigation system. 401 LS460_600h_Navi_U 9 LEXUS ENFORM Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION SEARCHING eDestinations 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote 7 Select the screen button of the desired action. Touch. No. Function Select to register as a memory point. 2 3 4 5 Select “Dest.”. Select to set as a destination. Select “Point of Interest”. Select to call the registered number. Select “eDestination”. Select the desired eDestination category. 6 Select the desired location. DISPLAYING eDestination ICONS 1 Select on the map screen. (P. 72) 2 Select “Map Information”. 3 Select “eDestination”. 402 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION 5. Lexus Insider Lexus Insider is an optional function that can send audio messages, or articles, to participating owners’ vehicles via the navigation system. Potential Lexus Insider subjects might include, for example, Lexus vehicle technology tips, updates on regional Lexus events, or audio excerpts from Lexus Magazine articles. VIEWING AND PLAYING RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION When the vehicle is first powered on and a new Lexus Insider article is available, a notification will appear on the navigation screen.The notice will appear for only approximately 6 seconds unless one of the options listed is selected. 1 When the new message notification ap- “Read All”: Select to listen to all stored Lexus Insider broadcasts.  To disrupt the audio read of Lexus Insider, press the “MODE” switch on the steering 9 wheel, or press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button on the audio system. LEXUS ENFORM pears, any of the following options can be selected. “Listen Now”: Select to play newly received Lexus Insider article(s). “Listen Later”: Select to close the notification screen without playing articles. The notification screen will be displayed again when the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode. 2 Select “Info”. 3 Select “Lexus Insider”. 4 Select the desired article title. 403 LS460_600h_Navi_U 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION MESSAGE ICONS Icons appear at the left of the Lexus Insider story titles and indicate the following. Icon Article Unread article Previously read article Unread article with downloadable Point of Interest (POI) Previously read article with downloadable Point of Interest (POI) 404 LS460_600h_Navi_U LISTENING TO ANOTHER ARTICLE 1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen. (P. 403) 2 Select the desired article. 3 Select “Next” or “Previous” to listen to another article.  The “ ” or “ ” switch on the steering wheel can be used to move to the previous or next article.  To stop listening to the broadcast, select “Stop” or press the “PWR·VOL” knob of the audio system. 2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION DOWNLOADING A POI DELETING Lexus Insider ARTICLE Some Lexus Insider articles will contain a downloadable POI relevant to the content. 1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen. 1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen. 2 Select “Delete”. 3 Select the item to be deleted and select (P. 403) 2 Select the desired article. 3 Select “Enter ”.  If a POI is contained, “Enter ” can be selected to download a POI to the navigation system. (P. 403) “Delete”. 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 4 Select “Go” to set the POI as a destination with route directions. 9 LEXUS ENFORM 405 LS460_600h_Navi_U 3. SETUP 1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS The settings of App Suite can be changed. SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. No. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “LEXUS App Suite”. 4 Select the items to be set. 406 LS460_600h_Navi_U Information Page Select to set the voice guidance volume.  Select to set the pop up reminder for cellular phone data usage. 407 Select to set Lexus Insider settings. 407 Select to reset all setup items.  3. SETUP PHONE DATA PLAN POP-UP SETTINGS Lexus Insider SETTINGS The phone data plan pop-up can be set when a paid application is downloaded. Lexus Insider settings, notification, and opt in or out of article receipt can be changed. 1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite Set- 1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite Set- 2 Select “Mobile Data Usage Notifica- 2 Select “LEXUS Insider”. 3 Select the items to be set. tings” screen. (P. 406) tion”. 3 Check the desired function to be oper- tings” screen. (P. 406) ated. No. Function Select to set the receiving of Lexus Insider articles yes/no. Select to set the new message notification on/off. LEXUS ENFORM Select to reset all setup items. 407 LS460_600h_Navi_U 9 3. SETUP 408 LS460_600h_Navi_U 10 1 12.3-INCH DISPLAY 2 1 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION 3 1. 12.3-INCH 4 DISPLAY-OVERVIEW ....................... 410 FULL SCREEN DISPLAY .................................... 410 SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY................................... 410 5 2. USING “Side Display” ............................. 412 BASIC SCREENS .................................................... 412 6 INTERRUPTION SCREENS .............................. 414 7 8 9 10 409 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION 1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW FULL SCREEN DISPLAY The following functions can be displayed full screen: Function Page Initial screen 30 “Menu” screen 14 Map screen* 72 *: With navigation function SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. For example, audio screen can be displayed and operated while the map screen is being displayed. The large screen on the left of the display is called the “Main Display”, and the small screen to the right is called the “Side Display”. “Main Display” 410 LS460_600h_Navi_U “Side Display” 1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION “Main Display” For details about the functions and operation of the “Main Display”, refer to the respective section. “Side Display” The following functions can be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. Basic screens Function Page Navigation system 412 Audio 413 Phone 414 Vehicle information “Owner’s Manual” Air conditioning “Owner’s Manual” OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY When the split-screen is displayed, it is necessary to select the screen you wish to operate (“Main Display” or “Side Display”). When selecting the “Main Display” 1 Move the Remote Touch knob to the left. When selecting the “Side Display” 1 Move the Remote Touch knob to the right. Interrupt screens Function Page 335 Phone 415 Destination Assist* 400 Driving mode “Owner’s Manual” Lexus night view “Owner’s Manual” 10 12.3-INCH DISPLAY Intuitive parking assist *: With navigation function 411 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION 2. USING “Side Display” BASIC SCREENS To change the screen displayed on the “Side Display”, use the screen buttons on the right side of the display. SWITCHING THE BASIC SCREEN 1 Select the desired button. No. NAVIGATION SYSTEM A map* or a compass with information about the current position can be displayed. The orientation can be changed between 2D north-up, 2D heading-up and 3D heading-up by selecting the orientation symbol.(P.77) Function Select to display the navigation screen. Select to display the audio control screen. Select to display the phone screen. Select to display the vehicle information screen. Select to display the air conditioning control screen. *: With navigation function 412 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM ■ SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE 1 Select “”. 2 Select the desired source. ■ RADIO OPERATION On the “Side Display”, preset stations can be selected. ■ MEDIA OPERATION Operations such as selecting a chapter, file or track are carried out on the screen. No. Function  Select to select a chapter/track/ file.  Select and hold to rewind. Select to stop the video screen. Select to play/pause. “ ”, “ ”: Select to tune in to the desired preset station/channel.  Select to select a chapter/track/ file.  During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.  During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward. ●Depending on the audio source, some functions may not be available. 413 LS460_600h_Navi_U 12.3-INCH DISPLAY INFORMATION 10 1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION HANDS-FREE SYSTEM (FOR CELLULAR PHONE) When hands-free mode is selected, it is possible to make call on the “Side Display” if the desired contact is registered on the 5 displayed buttons. 1 Select the desired contact. INTERRUPTION SCREENS Intuitive parking assist screen, phone screen, etc. are displayed automatically in accordance with conditions. SWITCHING THE INTERRUPTION SCREEN When multiple interruption screens have been opened, the hidden screens can be brought forward and displayed once again. (The driving mode screen cannot be displayed again.) 1 Select “ ” or “ ” to select the desired 2 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed. ■ REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT A contact can be selected from the favorites list. (P.371) 1 Select “Add From Favorites”. 2 Select the desired contact. 3 Select the desired number. ■ DELETING THE CONTACT 1 Select and hold the screen button to change the contact. 2 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 414 LS460_600h_Navi_U display. 1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION HANDS-FREE SYSTEM (FOR CELLULAR PHONE) The following functions can also be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. For details about these functions, refer to the respective section. Calling on the Bluetooth® phone P.349 Incoming calls P.355 Incoming call waiting P.358 Talking on the Bluetooth® phone P.356 ■ DISPLAYING ON THE “Main Display” The screen can be displayed on the “Main Display” when carrying out an operation that cannot be conducted on the “Side Display”. 1 Select . INFORMATION ●Operation is still possible using the steering phone switch even if the phone screen is hidden behind another interruption screen. If the operation is conducted using a steering switch, the phone screen will automatically be brought to the front. For details on operating the steering phone switch and the “Main Display”: P.344 10 INFORMATION 12.3-INCH DISPLAY ●If “Side Display” is selected for any of the functions above and the function is activated, the status bar will be displayed on the “Side Display”. For details about the status bar: P.16 415 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION 416 LS460_600h_Navi_U 1 INDEX 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 417 LS460_600h_Navi_U ALPHABETICAL INDEX Numerics 12.3-inch display ...................................................... 410 Full screen display.............................................. 410 Split-screen display............................................ 410 A AAC........................................................... 168, 211, 213 Adding destinations.................................................. 112 “Address”....................................................................... 91 “Address Book”............................................... 96, 120 Adjacent road ............................................................ 115 AM.................................................................................. 151 Angle ............................................................................ 128 Applications.................................................. 382, 394 Area to avoid............................................................. 123 Arrival time................................................................. 105 Audio ............................................................................ 140 Audio screen adjustment................................ 148 Basic operation ................................................... 142 Disc slot .................................................................. 144 Selecting an audio source............................... 143 “Sound Settings” screen .................................. 146 System on/off....................................................... 142 USB/AUX port................................................... 145 Voice command system.................................. 150 Audio settings ........................................................... 199 Auto avoid traffic ...................................................... 131 Auto hide map buttons...........................................126 AUX................................................................................... 189 Control screen/panel....................................... 189 External options .................................................. 192 AUX port.......................................................... 145, 189 418 LS460_600h_Navi_U B Bluetooth® .................................................................. 39 Profiles...................................................................... 43 Registering a Bluetooth® audio player ........ 41 Registering a Bluetooth® phone................... 39 Bluetooth® audio.................................................... 184 Connecting........................................................... 188 Control screen/panel ...................................... 184 Listening................................................................. 188 Bluetooth® phone ................................................. 344 Basic operation.................................................. 345 Phone switch/microphone ........................... 346 Phonebook .......................................................... 348 Selling or disposing of the vehicle.............. 348 Voice command system................................. 347 Bluetooth® settings ................................................. 45 Bluetooth® setup screen.................................. 45 Connecting a Bluetooth® device................. 48 Deleting a Bluetooth® device ........................ 48 Detailed Bluetooth® settings.......................... 52 Editing the Bluetooth® device information.......................................... 50 Registering a Bluetooth® device .................. 46 C D Caching a radio program.................................... 155 Calibration.................................................................. 129 Call history................................................................ 350 Calling on the Bluetooth® phone................... 349 Call history........................................................... 350 Dial pad................................................................. 353 Favorites lists....................................................... 350 Off hook switch ................................................. 354 Phonebook........................................................... 351 Camera...................................................................... 328 Camera display ................................... 37, 320, 327 Casual speech recognization........................... 305 CD................................................................................. 168 Control screen/panel ...................................... 168 Clock setting............................................................... 58 Command list .......................................................... 306 Connecting a Bluetooth® device...................... 48 Contacts .......................................................... 351, 366 “Coordinates”............................................................. 99 Current position........................................................ 75 Data services settings............................................ 316 Day mode ..................................................................... 37 DCM................................................................. 388, 391 Dealer setting.............................................................. 67 Deleting destinations .............................................. 113 Deleting personal data............................................. 61 Deleting previous destinations .......................... 125 Destination Assist.......................................... 96, 400 Destination search operation.............................. 88 “Address”.................................................................. 91 “Address Book”..................................................... 96 “Coordinates” ........................................................ 99 “Destination Assist” ............................................. 96 “Emergency” .......................................................... 97 Home........................................................................ 90 “Intersection & Freeway” .................................. 97 “Map”......................................................................... 99 “Point of Interest”.................................................. 92 Preset destinations.............................................. 90 “Previous Destinations” ..................................... 96 Search area............................................................ 90 Detailed navigation settings................................ 126 Detour............................................................................ 114 Dial pad...................................................................... 353 Disc slot ....................................................................... 144 Doppler weather ..................................................... 314 DSP ............................................................................... 148 DVD................................................................................ 171 Control screen/panel......................................... 171 DVD options ........................................................ 174 DVD player and disc............................................ 205 419 LS460_600h_Navi_U ALPHABETICAL INDEX E F e-mail .......................................................................... 359 eDestination............................................................... 401 Downloading........................................................ 401 Icons....................................................................... 402 Searching............................................................. 402 Editing route ................................................................ 112 Adding destinations............................................. 112 Adjacent road....................................................... 115 Deleting destinations ......................................... 113 Detour...................................................................... 114 Reordering destinations .................................... 112 Route preference ................................................ 113 Route type .............................................................. 113 “Emergency” ............................................................... 97 Favorites lists........................................................... 350 File (audio) ................................................................... 211 FM ................................................................................... 151 Foot print map ............................................................ 76 Freeway....................................................................... 107 Function index ............................................................ 26 420 LS460_600h_Navi_U G General settings ........................................................ 56 GPS (Global Positioning System) ................... 132 Guiding the route .................................... 24, 105, 111 H Heading-up ................................................................. 77 Home ............................................................ 25, 90, 117 I L Icon information ........................................................ 83 Incoming call waiting............................................ 358 Incoming calls.......................................................... 355 “Information” screen................................................ 20 Initial screen ................................................................ 30 Internet radio ............................................................. 167 Intersection................................................................ 109 “Intersection & Freeway”....................................... 97 Intuitive parking assist.......................................... 334 Detection range ................................................ 338 Display................................................................... 335 Distance display and buzzer........................ 336 Failure warning .................................................. 340 Information .......................................................... 338 Sensors.................................................................. 334 Switch .................................................................... 334 Intuitive parking assist setting............................. 341 Alert volume ......................................................... 341 Display and tone indication .......................... 342 Parking sonar display........................................ 341 iPod..................................................................... 180, 210 Control screen/panel ...................................... 180 Music....................................................................... 183 Video....................................................................... 183 LEXUS App Suite...................................... 387, 394 Entering keyword............................................. 399 Using...................................................................... 394 Web search ........................................................ 398 LEXUS App Suite settings ................................ 406 LEXUS Enform ...................................................... 382 Before using the function .............................. 386 LEXUS App Suite............................................ 387 LEXUS Enform Destinations ........................... 400 LEXUS Enform Remote.......................... 383, 392 LEXUS Enform Service Connect ....... 383, 393 Lexus Insider............................................................ 403 Viewing and playing........................................ 403 Lexus parking assist monitor .............................. 318 Area displayed on screen.............................. 327 Camera................................................................. 328 Driving precautions........................................... 318 Screen display.................................................... 320 List screen..................................................................... 35 Low fuel warning...................................................... 128 K Keyboard...................................................................... 34 421 LS460_600h_Navi_U ALPHABETICAL INDEX M Maintenance................................................................ 66 “Map”.............................................................................. 99 Map database ........................................................... 135 microSD card....................................................... 135 Map icons .................................................................... 84 Map screen .......................................................... 72, 75 Adjusting location ................................................ 79 Current position.................................................... 75 Map mode ............................................................... 78 Map scale................................................................. 76 Orientation.............................................................. 77 Scrolling the map.................................................. 78 Map screen information ........................................ 80 Icon information................................................... 83 Map icons ............................................................... 84 Route trace............................................................. 82 422 LS460_600h_Navi_U MEDIA button.......................................................... 143 Memory point................................................... 96, 120 Memory points settings.......................................... 116 “Address Book” .................................................. 120 Area to avoid ....................................................... 123 Deleting previous destinations..................... 125 Home ........................................................................ 117 “Preset Destinations”.......................................... 118 “Menu” screen.............................................................. 14 Status display .......................................................... 16 Message..................................................................... 359 Calling the message sender......................... 363 Checking............................................................... 361 Receiving.............................................................. 360 Replying ................................................................ 362 microSD card ........................................................... 135 Microphone.............................................................. 298 MMS............................................................................ 359 Mobile Assistant.........................................................311 MP3............................................................ 168, 211, 213 N P Navigation .................................................................... 72 Navigation options.................................................... 74 North-up........................................................................ 77 Phonebook..................................................... 348, 351 Phone switch/microphone................................. 346 Phone settings ......................................................... 364 “Contacts/Call History” ................................ 366 “Messaging”......................................................... 373 “Notifications”..................................................... 374 “Sounds”............................................................... 365 POI category ........................................... 80, 92, 127 “Point of Interest”....................................................... 92 Predictive traffic data.............................................. 86 Preset destinations................................................... 90 “Previous Destinations” .......................................... 96 Profiles ........................................................................... 43 PRST·TRACK button............................................. 140 PWR·VOL knob............................................... 31, 142 O Off hook switch ...................................................... 354 Online search................................................. 92, 398 Operating information ........................................ 204 DVD player and disc....................................... 205 Error messages.................................................... 215 File (audio) .............................................................. 211 iPod.......................................................................... 210 Radio ...................................................................... 204 Terms ....................................................................... 213 423 LS460_600h_Navi_U ALPHABETICAL INDEX R S Radio ............................................................................... 151, 204 Caching a radio program ............................... 155 Control screen/panel........................................ 151 Preset button screen..........................................154 Presetting a station ............................................ 154 Radio broadcast data system ........................ 157 Selecting a station from the list ..................... 155 Troubleshooting guide..................................... 160 Using HD Radio™ technology..................... 158 RADIO button.......................................................... 143 Radio ID....................................................................... 165 Rear seat audio controls....................................... 196 Rear seat entertainment system........................ 216 Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone............. 355 Incoming calls .................................................... 355 Registering home .............................................. 22, 117 Registering preset destinations.................. 23, 118 Remote Touch ..................................................... 12, 32 Reordering destinations ......................................... 112 Restarting the system................................................ 31 Road preference............................................. 104, 113 Route guidance ....................................................... 100 Route guidance screen......................................... 105 Arrow screen ........................................................ 110 Freeway.................................................................. 107 Intersection ........................................................... 109 Route overview ................................................... 107 Turn list screen...................................................... 110 Route information bar ........................................... 106 Route overview ........................................................ 107 Route preferences ................................................... 113 Route trace.................................................................. 82 Route type ................................................................... 113 Safety Connect ........................................................ 391 Scale ............................................................................... 76 Screen adjustment.................................................... 37 Screen change button...................................... 72, 75 Camera display..................................................... 37 Screen off ..................................................................... 37 Screen off image ....................................................... 59 Screen size................................................................. 148 Scrolling the map ...................................................... 78 Search area ................................................................. 90 Search engine................................................. 92, 398 Sending tones .......................................................... 356 Sensors....................................................................... 334 “Setup” screen............................................................. 18 Side display................................................................ 412 Basic screens ....................................................... 412 Interruption screens.......................................... 414 Single map.................................................................... 78 SMS ............................................................................. 359 “Sound Settings” screen....................................... 146 Startup image ............................................................. 59 Status display ............................................................... 16 Steering switches ......................................... 193, 298 424 LS460_600h_Navi_U T Talking on the Bluetooth® phone................... 356 Incoming call waiting....................................... 358 Time zone..................................................................... 58 Traffic information .................................................... 85 Show traffic event information ....................... 85 Show traffic information.................................... 86 Traffic settings .......................................................... 130 Auto avoid traffic.................................................. 131 Transmit volume..................................................... 356 Travel time ................................................................. 105 TUNE·SCROLL knob .......................................... 140 Turn list ....................................................... 78, 103, 110 Turn list screen........................................................... 110 U USB memory............................................................. 176 Control screen/panel ....................................... 176 USB/AUX port ........................................................ 145 V “Vehicle”........................................................................ 65 Dealer setting......................................................... 67 Maintenance .......................................................... 66 Voice command system.......................... 298, 347 Casual speech recognization ..................... 305 Command list..................................................... 306 Operation............................................................. 299 Steering switches ............................................. 298 Voice guidance prompts......................................... 111 Voice settings.............................................................. 63 W Weather ...................................................................... 314 Web search ............................................................. 398 WMA ........................................................ 168, 211, 213 X XM Satellite Radio.................................................... 161 Control screen/panel......................................... 161 How to subscribe to an XM Satellite Radio........................................ 163 If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions...... 166 Radio ID.................................................................. 165 Selecting a channel from the list .................. 165 425 LS460_600h_Navi_U Map database information and updates This system uses the maps of DENSO. 426 LS460_600h_Navi_U 427 LS460_600h_Navi_U 428 LS460_600h_Navi_U 429 LS460_600h_Navi_U 430 LS460_600h_Navi_U 431 LS460_600h_Navi_U 432 LS460_600h_Navi_U 433 LS460_600h_Navi_U 434 LS460_600h_Navi_U Certification U.S.A.  FCC ID : AJDK086  This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada iIcence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.  Information to User - Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user's right to operate the equipment.  Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada  IC : 775E-K086  This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada iIcence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d'lndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. 435 LS460_600h_Navi_U  Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, MusicID, Playlist Plus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries 436 LS460_600h_Navi_U 437 LS460_600h_Navi_U For U.S. owners 438 LS460_600h_Navi_U